TANDBERG Alteia M2/PDU/942, M2/P8R/942, M2/PSR/932, M2/PSR/942, M2/PTR/94x, M2/PTRE/94x Professional Receivers and Decoders Instruction Manual
The Alteia M2/PDU/942, Alteia M2/P8R/942, Alteia M2/PSR/932, Alteia M2/PSR/942, Alteia M2/PTR/94x, Alteia M2/PTRE/94x are a component of TANDBERG Television’s range of equipment. They are designed for use by broadcasters and distributors of video and audio services. The Alteia is designed to receive, decode, decrypt, multiplex, and output signals for a variety of broadcast applications. The receiver can receive signals from a variety of sources, including satellite, terrestrial (DVB-T), and digital ENG.
Advertisement
Advertisement
ST.TM.E9200.8
Issue 8
ENGLISH (UK)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Alteia and Alteia plus
Professional Receivers and Decoders
Software Version 2.1 (and later)
[Demultiplexer App Code Version]
M2/PDU/942, M2/P8R/942, M2/PSR/932,
M2/PSR/942, M2/PTR/94x, M2/PTRE/94x and Options
Typical Alteia plus Satellite Receiver
Preliminary Pages
ENGLISH (UK)
READ THIS FIRST!
If you do not understand the contents of this manual
DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT.
Also, translation into any EC official language of this manual can be made available, at your cost.
ITALIANO
LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO!
Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale
NON UTILIZZARE L’APPARECCHIATURA.
È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale, ma il costo è a carico dell’utente.
SVENSKA
LÄS DETTA FÖRST!
Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok
ARBETA DÅ INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING.
En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok kan också anskaffas, på
Er bekostnad.
NEDERLANDS
LEES DIT EERST!
Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt
STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING.
U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten, een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen.
PORTUGUÊS
LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA!
Se não compreende o texto deste manual
NÃO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO.
O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do manual para o português à própria custa.
SUOMI
LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ!
Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä
ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA.
Käsikirja voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella.
FRANÇAIS
AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT!
Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel
NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL.
En outre, nous pouvons vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française de ce manuel.
DANSK
LÆS DETTE FØRST!
Udstyret må ikke betjenes
MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR INDHOLDET AF DENNE
HÅNDBOG.
Vi kan også for Deres regning levere en dansk oversættelse af denne håndbog.
DEUTSCH
LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS!
Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein, dann
BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT!
Eine Übersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen
Berechnung lieferbar.
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
ÄΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡÙΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ!
Αν δεν καταλÜβετε το περιεχüìενο αυτοý του βοηθÞìατοò/εγχειριδßου
ΜΗΝ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ.
Επßσηò, αυτü το εγχειρßδιο εßναι διαθÝσιìο σε ìετÜφραση
σε αυτÞ τη γλþσσα και ìπορεßτε να το αγορÜσετε.
ESPAÑOL
LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO!
Si no entiende el contenido de este manual
NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO.
Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al
(idioma) previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted mismo.
This document and the information contained in it is the property of
TANDBERG Television Ltd and may be the subject of patents pending and granted. It must not be used for commercial purposes nor copied, disclosed, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise), whether in whole or in part, without TANDBERG Television’s prior written agreement.
Ó 1998 – 2002 TANDBERG Television Ltd. All rights reserved.
Issue 8 first published in 2002 by:
T
ANDBERG
T
ELEVISION
L
TD
R
EGISTERED
A
DDRESS
:
U
NIT
2 S
TRATEGIC
P
ARK
, C
OMINES
W
AY
,
H
EDGE
E
ND
, S
OUTHAMPTON
,
H
AMPSHIRE
, SO30 4DA
U
NITED
K
INGDOM
Registered Company Number 03695535
Page ii Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preliminary Pages
List of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
This chapter identifies the equipment versions covered by this manual; describes the purpose of the equipment in a typical system; provides a summary of its main features; identifies the controls, indicators and connectors in a guided tour of the front and rear panels; and lists the available options.
Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment
This chapter provides a guide to the suitability of an installation; gives detailed procedures for the preparation, installation and configuration of the equipment including important safety information; provides pin-out details of the the external connectors; and details the power-up/-down procedures.
Chapter 3: Operating the Equipment Locally
This chapter provides a guide to using the LCD interface and details the setting-up, configuration and operating procedures.
Chapter 4: Alarms
This chapter provides a guide to configuring the alarm interface.
Chapter 5: Options
This chapter describes the options available for the Alteia and Alteia plus.
It also describes the range of associated Conditional Access modules.
Chapter 6: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
This chapter details routine maintenance tasks to be performed; provides general servicing advice, and information regarding warranty and maintenance; lists the error messages that may occur, and any appropriate Operator action to be taken; provides general fault-finding information for other types of problem which may be encountered.
Annex A: Glossary
Annex B: Technical Specification
Annex C: Menus
Annex D: Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
Annex E: Language Abbreviations
Annex F: Factory Defaults
Annex G: Quick Reference Guide
Index
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page iii
Preliminary Pages
About this Manual
Introduction
This manual provides instructions and information for the installation and operation of the Alteia. It should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the equipment. Further copies of this manual can be ordered from the address shown on page vi. If passing the equipment to a third party, also pass on the relevant documentation.
Revisions
It is not intended that this manual is amended by the issue of individual pages. Any revision will be by a complete reissue.
Issues of this Manual
Issues of this manual are listed below:
Issue
1
2
2r1
3
4
5
5r1
6
6r1
7
Date
Sept 1998
Feb 1999
Mar 1999
Sept 1999
Jun 2000
Sept 2000
Oct 2000
June 2001
Aug 2001
Oct 2001
Software Version
(Demux App Code Ver.
Menu #13 Page 11)
1.0
2.1
2.1
2.1 – 2.3
2.1 to 2.5
2.1 – 2.6
2-1 – 2.6
2-1 – 2.8
2.1 – 2.8
2.1 – 2.8
2.1 – 2.9
Comments
Initial release.
Covers v2.1 of the Demux board. Reflects rev 15 and 16 of Alteia requirement document. LS Data added. HS Data added after v2.1. User defined languages added.
New model added (M2/PSR/932C). Note added that CA is not available with Terrestrial (PTR) models.
Reflects up to rev 28 of Alteia requirement document.
Text, graphics and menu updates. Alteia plus models added.
Reformatted to corporate style. BISS entries added. New Video fail mode (no syncs) added. M2/PDU/942C added.
References to PAL-M removed.
References to PAL-M added for M2/…/942D variants.
BISS Mode-E entry added. M2/PTRE/948C included.
Rearrangement of Preliminary Pages. Addition of copyright Patent
Declaration on page v.
FEC and Symbol rates updated. Minor text changes. Additional
Frame Sync information.
Updates for M2/PTRE/948CVL (Voyager Lite).
8 Jul 2002
The following associated manuals are also available:
·
ST.TS.E9200: Remote Control Protocol
·
ST.QR.E9200: Alteia Receivers and Decoders Quick Reference Guide
·
ST.QR.Director.E9200: Using the Alteia Receiver with Director
Page iv Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preliminary Pages
Acknowledgements
General
All best endeavours have been made to acknowledge registered trademarks and trademarks used throughout this manual. Any notified omissions will be rectified in the next issue of this manual.
Some trademarks may be registered in some countries but not in others.
In general, the situation in the UK will prevail throughout TANDBERG
Television Limited manuals.
Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and marked with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked within the text of this manual.
Trademarks
Alteia
™
is a trademark of TANDBERG Television Limited.
Registered Trademarks
Alteia plus
®
is a registered trademark of TANDBERG Television Limited.
Dolby Digital
®
and AC-3
®
are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation
.
Macrovision
®
is a registered trademark of Macrovision Corporation
Patent Declaration
Refers to Alteia plus M2/xxx/942C units with PAL-M compatibility and all
M2/xxx/942D units.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovison, and is intended limited pay-per-view used only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page v
Preliminary Pages
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
WARNINGS...
WARNINGS GIVE INFORMATION WHICH, IF STRICTLY OBSERVED, WILL PREVENT PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPERTY OR THE ENVIRONMENT. THEY
ARE BOXED AND SHADED FOR EMPHASIS, AS IN THIS EXAMPLE, AND ARE PLACED
IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE POINT AT WHICH THE READER REQUIRES THEM.
CAUTIONS...
Cautions give information that if strictly followed, will prevent damage to equipment or other goods. They are boxed for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them.
NOTES...
Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the relevant text.
EMC Compliance
This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in Annex B,
Technical Specification. To maintain this certification, only use the leads supplied or if in doubt contact Customer Services.
Page vi Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preliminary Pages
Contact Information
TANDBERG Television Customer Services
Support Services
Our primary objective is to provide first class customer care that is tailored to your specific business and operational requirements. All levels are supported by one or more service performance reviews to ensure the perfect partnership between TANDBERG Television and your business.
Levels of Support
All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
·
For standalone equipment, then TANDBERG Television BASIC
Advantage is the value for money choice for you.
BASIC provides you with year-by-year Service long after the warranty has expired.
·
For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage.
These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income through enlisting the help of TANDBERG Television support specialists.
·
VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution.
This provides a service specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational.
Where to Find Us
Europe, Middle East and Africa:
Norway:
Americas:
China:
Australia/NZ:
Germany:
Poland:
Internet Address:
+44 (0) 23 8048 4455
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4467 [email protected]
+47 6711 6200
+1 (321) 308 0470 [email protected]
+86 10 6539 1109 (Beijing)
+ 852 2899 7000 (Hong Kong) [email protected]
+61 2 9356 8599 [email protected]
+49 8996 999 870
+48 58 3000 940
http://www.tandbergtv.com
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page vii
Preliminary Pages
Technical Training
Training Courses
TANDBERG Television provides a wide range of training courses on the operation and maintenance of our products and on their supporting technologies. TANDBERG can provide both regularly scheduled courses and training tailored to individual needs. Courses can be run either at your premises or at one of our dedicated training facilities.
Where to Find Us
For further information on TANDBERG Television's training programme please contact us:
International Telephone:
International Facsimile
+44 23 8048 4229
+44 23 8048 4467
E-mail Address: [email protected]
Internet Address http://www.tandbergtv.com
Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address
Tandberg Television
Unit 2
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Return of Equipment
If you need to return equipment for repair, please contact the Customer
Services Helpdesk on +44 (0) 23 8048 4455. A Returns Authorisation
Number (RAN) will be issued and full details of the unit will be logged.
Please ensure the RAN number is clearly marked on the packaging of the unit. The unit should then be sent to the following address:
Tandberg Television – Customer Services
Unit 1
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Page viii Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Chapter 1
1.
Introduction
Contents
1.1 Scope of this Manual................................................. 1-3
1.1.1 Who Should Use this Manual ....................... 1-3
1.1.2 What this Manual Describes......................... 1-3
Identifying the Equipment ............................. 1-3
Marketing Code Suffixes............................... 1-4
Software Versions......................................... 1-4
1.2 Summary of Features................................................ 1-7
1.2.1 Main Features............................................... 1-7
All Models ..................................................... 1-7
Enhanced Features (Alteia plus) .................. 1-8
1.2.2 Inputs............................................................ 1-9
1.2.3 Outputs ......................................................... 1-9
Transport Stream Output.............................. 1-9
Video Outputs............................................... 1-9
Audio Outputs............................................. 1-10
Data Outputs............................................... 1-10
Alarm Output............................................... 1-10
1.2.4 Conditional Access and Scrambling ........... 1-11
1.3 The Decoder ........................................................... 1-11
1.3.1 Typical Applications.................................... 1-11
1.3.2 What the Decoder Does ............................. 1-12
1.3.3 Input Connections....................................... 1-12
1.4 The Satellite Receiver............................................. 1-12
1.4.1 Models Covered.......................................... 1-12
1.4.2 Typical Satellite System.............................. 1-12
1.4.3 What the Satellite Receiver Does ............... 1-13
1.4.4 Over-air Software Download (Director)....... 1-14
1.4.5 Input Connections....................................... 1-14
1.5 The Terrestrial Receiver.......................................... 1-14
1.5.1 Typical Terrestrial Arrangement ................. 1-14
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
1.5.2 What The Terrestrial Receiver Does...........1-15
1.5.3 Input Connections .......................................1-15
1.6 The Digital ENG Receiver........................................1-16
1.6.1 Typical Digital ENG System ........................1-16
1.6.2 Input Connections .......................................1-16
1.7 Alteia Control Modes ...............................................1-16
1.7.1 Introduction .................................................1-16
1.7.2 Local Control (via the Front Panel)..............1-17
Normal (non-edit) State...............................1-17
Edit State.....................................................1-17
1.7.3 Remote Control ...........................................1-18
1.7.4 Director Over-air Control .............................1-18
1.8 Guided Tour.............................................................1-19
1.8.1 Construction ................................................1-19
1.8.2 Front Panel Controls ...................................1-19
1.8.3 Front Panel LEDs........................................1-20
1.8.4 Bit Error Ratio Meter....................................1-21
1.8.5 Audio and Video Monitoring ........................1-21
1.8.6 Conditional Access and Scrambling
Options........................................................1-22
VideoGuard .................................................1-22
RAS 1 and 2................................................1-22
BISS (ver 2.8 and Later)..............................1-22
1.8.7 Rear Panel ..................................................1-22
Page 1-1
Introduction
List of Figures
Figure 1.1: Front View of an Alteia plus Satellite Receiver ............1-3
Figure 1.2: Make-up of Alteia Marketing Codes .............................1-3
Figure 1.3: Typical Decoder Applications.....................................1-11
Figure 1.4: What The Decoder Does............................................1-12
Figure 1.5: Typical Satellite System.............................................1-13
Figure 1.6: What the Satellite Receiver Does ..............................1-13
Figure 1.7: Typical Over-air Download Arrangement ...................1-14
Figure 1.8: Typical Terrestrial Broadcast Monitoring
Arrangement................................................................1-15
Figure 1.9: What the Terrestrial Receiver Does ...........................1-15
Figure 1.10: Typical Digital ENG Contribution System.................1-16
Figure 1.11: What the Digital ENG Receiver Does ......................1-16
Figure 1.12: Local Control – Front Panel......................................1-17
Figure 1.13: Front Panel States....................................................1-17
Figure 1.14: Remote Control Mode ..............................................1-18
Figure 1.15: Front Panel Controls ................................................1-19
Figure 1.16: Alteia Front Panel Indicators ....................................1-20
Figure 1.17: BER Status Meter.....................................................1-21
Figure 1.18: Audio and Video Monitoring .....................................1-21
Figure 1.19: Alteia Satellite Receiver Rear Panel ........................1-22
List of Tables
Table 1.1: Marketing Code Suffixes............................................... 1-4
Table 1.2: Models and Software Versions Covered by this
Manual.......................................................................... 1-4
Table 1.3: Main Features of the Decoder Range........................... 1-5
Table 1.4: Main Features of the Receiver Range.......................... 1-6
Table 1.5: Software Version Updates............................................ 1-6
Page 1-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
1.1 Scope of this Manual
1.1.1 Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is written for operators/users of the Alteia and Alteia plus range of Professional Receivers and Decoders. It describes the unit’s functions and operation. The manual is written to assist in the installation and day-to-day care and operation of the unit. Maintenance information requiring the covers to be removed is not included.
CAUTION...
Removing the covers of this equipment may invalidate the warranty.
1.1.2 What this Manual Describes
Identifying the Equipment
The Receivers and Decoders are designated by the marketing codes shown in Table 1.2.
Figure 1.1: Front View of an Alteia plus Satellite Receiver
NOTE…
Alteia plus products are identified by having Marketing codes ending in /94xB or /94xC.
The Marketing Code and fitted options are displayed as part of the System
Menu (#13) accessed through the LCD display. The Marketing Code is defined by the following fields:
PDU A Decoder
P8R An 8PSK Satellite Receiver
PSR A BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver
PTR A Digital Terrestrial Receiver
PTRE A Terrestrial Receiver for use with Digital ENG
3 Analogue output
4 Analogue and Digital outputs
2 4:2:2 capability
8 A PTR receiver with 2k or 8k carrier capability
See Table 1.1 for an explanation of Marketing Code suffixes
M2/xxx/9x2x
Figure 1.2: Make-up of Alteia Marketing Codes
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-3
Introduction
Marketing
Code
M2/PDU/942
M2/PDU/942B
M2/PDU/942C
M2/PDU/942D
M2/P8R/942A
M2/P8R/942C
M2/P8R/942D
Marketing Code Suffixes
Table 1.1 describes the meaning of the Marketing Code Suffixes.
Table 1.1: Marketing Code Suffixes
Suffix Models Affected
B
C none
A
D
Alteia
Alteia
Alteia plus
Alteia plus
(not M2/PSR/932C)
Alteia
(M2/PSR/932C only)
M2/PDU/942D
M2/PSR/942D
M2/P8R/942D
Description
Base model
Incorporates RS-422 High-speed Data output
Optional enhanced feature set enabled (from s/w version 2.4).
Optional enhanced feature set enabled and improved SDI jitter performance when frame synchronized, see Table 1.2 (from s/w version 2.5)
4 L-band inputs, see Table 1.4.
As suffix C models but with PAL-M operation fully supported.
Software Versions
This manual has been written to cover the functions of software versions
2.9 and later. This can be checked using the System Menu (#13) pages.
These are described in Annex C, Menus.
Table 1.2: Models and Software Versions Covered by this Manual
Part
Number
E9203
E10051
E10057
E10091
E10047
E10071
E10092
Description
Decoder with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability (byte-mode input only). PAL-M is not supported.
Decoder with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features. Byte-mode input only. PAL-M is not supported.
Decoder with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features and improved jitter performance when frame sync’d. Byte-mode input and single packet burst mode input. PAL-M is not supported.
Decoder with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features and improved jitter performance when frame sync’d. Byte-mode input and single packet burst mode input. PAL-M operation is fully supported.
8PSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability and RS-422 high-speed data output. PAL-M is not supported.
8PSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features and improved jitter performance when frame sync’d. PAL-M is not supported.
8PSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features and improved jitter performance when frame sync’d. PAL-M operation is fully supported.
S/W
Ver
2.2
2.5
®
2.8
®
Video / Audio
Output Format
Analogue and Digital
2.3
® Analogue and Digital
2.5
® Analogue and Digital
2.8
® Analogue and Digital
Page 1-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
Marketing
Code
M2/PSR/932
Part
Number
E9200
Description S/W
Ver
2.2
Video / Audio
Output Format
Analogue only
M2/PSR/932C
1
M2/PSR/942
M2/PSR/942A
M2/PSR/942B
M2/PSR/942C
M2/PSR/942D
M2/PTR/942
M2/PTR/948A
E10012
E9201
E10014
E10021
E10056
E10090
E9241
E10050
M2/PTRE/942
2
E10011
M2/PTRE/948C E10068
M2/PTRE/948CVL E10068
+LINA
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability. PAL-M is not supported.
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability. PAL-M is not supported.
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability. PAL-M is not supported.
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability and RS-422 high-speed data output. PAL-M is not supported.
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features. PAL-M is not supported.
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features.and improved SDI jitter performance when frame sync’d. PAL-M is not supported.
BPSK/QPSK Satellite Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability with a set of optional enhanced features.and improved SDI jitter performance when frame sync’d. PAL-M operation is fully supported.
Digital Terrestrial Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability (2K). PAL-M is not supported.
Digital Terrestrial Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability and RS-422 high-speed data output (2K and 8K). PAL-M is not supported.
Digital ENG Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability. PAL-M is not supported.
Digital ENG Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability, RS-422 high-speed data output and improved SDI jitter performance when frame sync’d.
70 MHz IF input. PAL-M is not supported.
Digital ENG Receiver with 4:2:0/4:2:2 capability, for use with Voyager Lite, complete with Linear Audio M2/PRO/LINA (linear audio software switch)
2.2
2.1
2.2
2.4
® Analogue and Digital
2.5
® Analogue and Digital
2.8
® Analogue and Digital
® 2.2 Analogue and Digital
2.3
® Analogue and Digital
2.2
® Analogue and Digital
2.5.4
Only
Analogue and Digital
2.9
Analogue only
Analogue and Digital
Analogue and Digital
Analogue and Digital
See Table 1.5 for a history of software enhancements and Table B.1 in
Annex B for the availability of the various models.
Table 1.3: Main Features of the Decoder Range
Marketing
Code
M2/PDU/942[B]
M2/PDU/942C[D]
Inputs
DVB-SPI, ASI-Copper, ASI-Fibre (byte-mode only)
DVB-SPI, 2 x ASI-Copper. Byte-mode input and single packet burst mode input supported.
Input Data-rate
Up to 54 Mbit/s
Up to 100 Mbit/s
Coding Digital
Outputs
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
1
2
M2/PSR/932C has 4 x L-band inputs.
Used with the E5100 and E6100 Encoders (Digital ENG) – see Manuals ST.TM.E10065 and ST.TM.E10016.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-5
2.3.x
2.4
2.5
2.54
2.8
Introduction
Table 1.4: Main Features of the Receiver Range
Marketing
Code
M2/P8R/942A[C][D]
Inputs Input Frequency Input Symbol rate
Satellite
8PSK
2 x L-Band 950 – 2150 MHz
Satellite
BPSK,
QPSK
Terrestrial
M2/PSR/932
M2/PSR/932C
2 x L-Band
4 x L-Band
M2/PSR/942[A][B][C][D] 4 x L-Band
M2/PTR/942
M2/PTR/948[A]
M2/PTRE/942
M2/PTRE/948C
M2/PTRE/948CVL
1 x UHF
1 x Baseband
950 – 2150 MHz
950 – 2150 MHz
950 – 2150 MHz
Channels 21 – 68
4.571 MHz (centre)
1 x 70 MHz I/P 70 MHz
1 x 70 MHz I/P 70 MHz
1 x 70 MHz I/P 70 MHz
8PSK:
3.0 – 30.0 MSym/s (FEC
5
/
6
)
3.0 – 24 MSym/s (FEC 8 /
9
)
(will operate up to 28.125)
QPSK: 1.0 – 43.0 MSym/s
1.0 – 44.5 MSym/s
1.0 – 44.5 MSym/s
1.0 – 44.5 MSym/s
4.98 – 31.67 MSym/s
4.98 – 31.67 MSym/s
4.98 – 31.67 MSym/s
4.98 – 31.67 MSym/s
Coding Digital
Outputs
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
4:2:0/4:2:2
4:2:0/4:2:2
4:2:0/4:2:2
4
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
4:2:0/4:2:2 4
Software
Release
2.1.x
2.2.x
2.9
NOTE…
All models have analogue outputs as standard.
Table 1.5 describes the change in functions with software update.
Table 1.5: Software Version Updates
Marketing
Code
Explanation
All
All
M2/PDU/942
M2/PSR/932
M2/PSR/942A
M2/PTRE/942
All
M2/P8R/942:
All with suffix B
All with suffix C
Added HS Data Functions, Added VITS standards.
Closed Caption now correctly passed in the VBI in 3:2 pulldown. Dolby Digital AC-3 supported
Supports automatic decoding of MPEG-2-only transport streams.
Decoder supported.
Satellite Receiver with 2 L-band inputs supported.
Satellite Receiver with 2 Mbit/s High-speed Synchronous Data supported.
Digital ENG Model supported.
DVB Subtitles supported.
Model Supported.
2 Mbit/s RS-422 Synchronous Data and enhanced functions supported.
2 Mbit/s RS-422 Synchronous Data and enhanced functions supported and improved SDI jitter performance when frame sync’d.
M2/PTRE/948C 70 IF MHz input functionality added.
B and C variants.
D variants.
Alteia plus added to titles throughout. BISS functionality added. Additional freeze frame option (no syncs) added. Linear Audio to year 2000 specification.
As B and C variants plus PAL-M operation is fully supported.
M2/PTRE/948CVL Alteia plus for Voyager Lite.
Page 1-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
1.2 Summary of Features
1.2.1 Main Features
All Models
The Receivers and Decoders are fully compliant with the appropriate sections of the MPEG-2
3
, DVB-S
4
, DVB-T
5
and DSNG
6
specifications.
The Alteia and Alteia plus range offers the following features:
·
Multiple RF Inputs (Satellite Receivers)
² L-band Alteia (Satellite) Receivers have either 2 or 4 inputs
(dependent on model). These are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4
² An Over-air force retune command can be received from the
Director system.
NOTES…
1. The Director system GUI counts the inputs from zero (i.e. 0, 1, 2, 3).
2. Director prior to version 3 assumed the use of RF input 1 for most commands.
Director versions 3 and onward allow selection of the RF input.
·
Front Panel Controls and Indications:
² A three row LCD display provides information and allows operator choice entry
² Rotary switches and pushbuttons provide the control interface in conjunction with the LCD display
² Operator defined top-level status screen is displayed as the default
² LEDs provide status information
·
Service Selection:
² Chosen from a menu list of available services carried in the currently received transport stream (TS)
² Up to 20 pre-selected choices stored within the unit
·
Video Decoding:
² 4:2:0 mode support video resolutions up to 720 pixels x 576 active lines (25 frame/s) or 720 pixels x 480 active lines (30 frame/s)
² 4:2:2 mode support video resolutions up to 720 pixels x 608 active lines (25 frame/s) or 720 pixels x 512 active lines (30 frame/s)
² Support for the following composite video outputs; PAL-B, -G, -I,
-N Combination, -N Normal, –M (PAL-M fully supported on D variants only) and NTSC-M (with pedestal or without)
² A video test point is available at the front panel
·
Audio Decoding:
² Sampling rates 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
3
4
5
6
Moving Pictures Expert Group: MPEG-2 specification ISO 13818.
European Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Project. EN 300 421 Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services: Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for the 11/12 GHz satellite service.
European Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Project. EN 300 744 Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services: Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for the terrestrial television.
European Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Project : EN 301 210 Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services: Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for digital satellite news gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-7
Introduction
² All MPEG-2 data rates
² Audio test points available at the front panel
·
Data:
² Low Speed Data: RS-232 asynchronous (up to 19.2 kbit/s)
·
Conditional Access/Scrambling:
² Remote Authorisation System (RAS) version I or II
7
² EBU Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)
7
² NDS VideoGuard
·
Transport Stream Output:
² DVB-SPI connector provides a semi-decrypted, fully decrypted or non-decrypted output stream. An ASI Copper and Optical output option is available
² Semi-decrypted, encrypted, decrypted (depends on CA used)
·
Director System:
² Over-air remote control is available if the Alteia is used as part of a
Director system (Over-air software downloading, Re-start, Tuning and Retuning etc.)
·
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) signalling support:
² Support for Closed Captions and ITS/VITS/VITC
² DVB Subtitles (from software release 2.3)
·
Remote Control:
² RS-232 or RS-485
² When the remote control is active, front panel control is disabled but status information is still available (protocol is available from
TANDBERG Television Limited)
·
Clock/Calendar:
² Available to UTC and local time
² Constantly updated when locked to a valid transport stream
Enhanced Features (Alteia plus)
·
Transport Stream Demultiplexing
² Maximum capability is 100 Mbit/s
·
Video Decoding
² Maximum Video Demultiplexing capability of 50 Mbit/s
·
Audio
² Audio embedding in the digital video output
² Supports the TANDBERG Television interpretation of
SMPTE 302M-1998 (linear audio) as specified in the applicable detailed specification [Option]. Either SMPTE 302M-1998 or
SMPTE 302M-2000 can be supported in S/W ver 2.8 and later but not together.
·
Data (also available on models with an A suffix)
² High Speed Data: RS-422 synchronous (up to 2.048 Mbit/s)
7
RAS I or II is not available for Terrestrial Receiver or Digital ENG models (M2/PTR[E]/942[A], M2/PTR[E]/948[A]).
Page 1-8 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
·
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) signalling support [Option]
² World System Teletext (WST)
² Video Programming System (VPS)/Programme Delivery and Control
(PDC)
² Wide Screen Signalling (WSS)
² Neilson Coding AMOL 1 and AMOL 2
² Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC)
² Video Index
² Inverted Teletext (v2.6 and later)
·
Error Data Handling (EDH)
² EDH is supported on the SDI (digital video) output
·
Frame Synchroniser [Option]
·
Options
² Purchasable options are available to enhance the functionality of the unit – see Chapter 5, Options
1.2.2 Inputs
These are model specific, details appear later in this chapter.
1.2.3 Outputs
Transport Stream Output
One 25-way D-type connector carrying the decoded transport stream in
DVB-SPI format.
The following restrictions apply to the transport stream output of the
M2/PDU/942C[D] Decoder model:
·
The SPI output is only available if the input to the Decoder is SPI. The
Decoder does not act as an ASI to SPI converter.
·
If the ASI output option card is used (see Chapter 5, Options) the output mode depends on the input mode. If the input mode is SPI, the
ASI output is byte-mode. If the input is ASI, the ASI output is single packet burst mode.
Video Outputs
M2/PSR/932[C]
·
Two analogue composite video outputs carried on BNC connectors.
M2/PDU/942[B][C][D],
M2/P8R/942A[C][D],
M2/PSR/942[A][B][C][D],
M2/PTR/942,
M2/PTR/948[A],
M2/PTRE/942,
M2/PTRE/948C
M2/PTRE/948CVL
·
One analogue composite video output carried on a BNC connector.
·
One ITU-R BT.656 digital video output carried on a BNC connector.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-9
Introduction
Audio Outputs
M2/PSR/932[C]
·
Four analogue audio outputs carried on XLR connectors. Depending on the input, these are menu configurable to allow up to two stereo, two dual-mono, four mono channels or a mix of these. The channels can carry different languages.
M2/PDU/942[B][C][D],
M2/P8R/942A[C][D],
M2/PSR/942[A][B][C][D],
M2/PTR/942,
M2/PTR/948[A],
M2/PTRE/942,
M2/PTRE/948C
M2/PTRE/948CVL
·
Two digital audio outputs carried on XLR connectors. Depending on the input, these are menu configurable to allow two stereo, two dual-mono, four mono digital channels or a mix of these. This configuration leaves two XLR connectors (left-hand) unused. The channels can carry different languages.
OR
·
One digital output plus one analogue stereo/dual-mono output.
Depending on the input, these are menu configurable to allow two stereo, two dual-mono, four mono analogue/digital channels or a mix of these. This configuration leaves one XLR connector (left-hand) unused. The channels can carry different languages.
OR
·
Four analogue audio outputs carried on XLR connectors. Depending on the input, these are menu configurable to allow up to two stereo, two dual-mono, four mono channels or a mix of these. The channels can carry different languages.
Data Outputs
·
RS-232 asynchronous low-speed data output carried on a 9-way,
D-type connector.
·
RS-422 synchronous 2 Mbit/s high-speed data output carried on a
15-way D-type connector. Available on Alteia plus models only.
Alarm Output
Alarm and failure monitoring is carried out within the equipment. This produces a summary alarm signal that lights the general front-panel
ALARM LED. The Alarm conditions also drive auxiliary relays each providing a contact at the rear of the unit. The operator can define (using the Alarm Menu pages) which alarm conditions drive the relay and also the general front-panel ALARM LED. This is described in Chapter 4, Alarms and Annex C, Menus.
Page 1-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
1.2.4 Conditional Access and Scrambling
The following Conditional Access and Scrambling options are available for the Alteia and Alteia plus range of Satellite Receivers, Decoders and
M2/PTRE/948C Terrestrial Receivers.
·
No Conditional Access
·
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) only
·
VideoGuard and BISS
·
Remote Authorisation System (RAS) and BISS
·
VideoGuard, RAS and BISS
1.3 The Decoder
1.3.1 Typical Applications
The M2/PDU/942[B][C][D] Decoder is a component of TANDBERG
Television’s range of equipment. It is designed for use by broadcasters and distributors of video and audio services. It can be used, for example, as a transport stream monitor on the output of a compression system or to decode signals received over a telecommunications network, as shown below.
TANDBERG
Compression System
Output Router Splitter
ASI
ASI
Network Adapter Unit
ALTEIA
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Alteia Monitoring Decoder
Telecommunications
Network
Network Adapter Unit
ALTEIA
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Alteia Monitoring Decoder
Figure 1.3: Typical Decoder Applications
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-11
Introduction
1.3.2 What the Decoder Does
The front-end DVB-SPI and ASI interfaces are used to present a transport stream in the format required by the internal decoder circuitry.
The Decoder can be used to receive an input signal from a variety of sources. No error correction is supported at the input of the unit; if it is to receive signals via a telecom network, a level of Quality of Service should be negotiated with the Telecom Network Provider.
The Decoder is configured to select a single video service and other audio/data components from the multiple services on the incoming transport stream and present them at the output.
Incoming Transport Stream
Alteia Decoder
Select a service from the incoming transport stream
Select components from the chosen service
Video
Audio
Data
TS
Multiple services on the transport stream
Multiple components on the selected service
Figure 1.4: What The Decoder Does
1.3.3 Input Connections
The Decoder has the following inputs:
·
M2/PDU/942B: DVB-SPI (parallel) and ASI (byte-mode only) copper and fibre-optic interfaces for operation up to 54 Mbit/s
·
M2/PDU/942[C][D]: DVB-SPI (parallel) and 2 x ASI (byte-mode and single packet burst mode) copper interfaces for operation up to 100
Mbit/s
1.4 The Satellite Receiver
1.4.1 Models Covered
The following Receivers are covered in this section:
·
M2/P8R/942A[C][D] (8PSK)
·
M2/PSR/932[C] (BPSK/QPSK)
·
M2/PSR/940 (BPSK/QPSK)
·
M2/PSR/942[A][B][C][D] (BPSK/QPSK)
1.4.2 Typical Satellite System
The Alteia Satellite Receiver is a component of the MPEG-2/DVB compliant range of TANDBERG Television equipment. It is designed for use by broadcasters and distributors of video, audio and data services over satellite.
Page 1-12 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
Local
ï
Inputs í
ï
ï
ï
ï
ì
ï
ï
ï
î
ï
ï
ï
ï
TANDBERG
Ethernet
TANDBERG
Ethernet
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Encoder (1)
MPEG-2
TS
Ethernet
Transport Stream
Processor
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ± evolution 5000
Encoder (2)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ± evolution 5000
Encoder (n)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
TANDBERG
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Multiplexer (Main)
Ethernet
Control
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
TANDBERG
TANDBERG
Ethernet
Control
10baseT
evolution 5000
Multiplex Element Manager
Ethernet Hub
Figure 1.5: Typical Satellite System
Ethernet
Control evolution 5000
Modulator (Main)
Ethernet
Control
Ethernet
Control
▲
◄ ►
▼ evolution 5000
Multiplexer (Standby)
RS-232
Control
Output Router evolution 5000
Modulator (Standby)
▲
◄ ►
▼
TANDBERG
Up-converter and HPA
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Alteia Satellite
Receiver
1.4.3 What the Satellite Receiver Does
The Receiver can be tuned to a specified satellite channel frequency and polarisation. Referring to Figure 1.6, the input is down-converted via a
Low-Noise Block (LNB) to provide an L-band input to the Receiver. The front-end tuning is microprocessor controlled with a frequency synthesised local oscillator. A software tuning and acquisition algorithm resolves translation errors (mainly due to the LNB).
The signal is then passed to a demodulator that recovers the signal using soft-decision decoding. The resulting stream is Reed-Solomon decoded and descrambled to provide inputs to the decoder circuit. The received channel may contain multiple services, therefore the Receiver’s demultiplexer is configured to select a single video service and other audio/data components and present them at the output.
horizontal polarisation vertical polarisation f n f n+1
SHF f n+2 f n+3
LNB f n+4
L-band
Alteia Satellite Receiver
Tune to a satellite channel
Select a service from the satellite channel
Select components from the chosen service
Multiple satellite channels
Multiple services on the tuned satellite channel
Multiple components on the selected service
Figure 1.6: What the Satellite Receiver Does
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Video
Audio
Data
TS
Page 1-13
Introduction
1.4.4 Over-air Software Download (Director)
The Alteia Satellite Receiver is shipped with the appropriate firmware installed, but it is designed to allow replacement of this code by new versions of software transmitted over-air. The new code is downloaded as a background task in the same transport stream as used for the normal transmission of services. Figure 1.7 shows the system required for this function. The existing software continues to function during the download process. Once all the new code has been received, installed and validated, it is loaded into the active memory and becomes the operating firmware for the Receiver.
FMMs
Access Control
Computer
MPEG-2 Streams
Software
Download
Controller
Download
Service
Control
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Multiplexer
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Modulator
▲
◄ ►
▼
70/140
MHz IF
TANDBERG
Up-converter and HPA
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Alteia Satellite
Receiver evolution 5000
Multiplex Element Manager
Figure 1.7: Typical Over-air Download Arrangement
1.4.5 Input Connections
The Satellite Receiver interfaces directly to the Low-Noise Block (LNB).
It accepts an intermediate frequency (IF) input in the band 920 - 2150
MHz (M2/PSR models), and 950 - 2150 MHz (L-band; M2/P8R models), for operation in the specified symbol-rate range (see Annex B, Technical
Specification). The unit can provide dc power and polarisation switching to the LNB.
1.5 The Terrestrial Receiver
1.5.1 Typical Terrestrial Arrangement
The M2/PTR/942 or/948[A] Terrestrial Receiver is a component of
TANDBERG Television’s range of equipment. It is designed for use by broadcasters and distributors of video and audio services. Typically, the
Terrestrial Receiver is used for monitoring the output of a terrestrial transmitter. This is illustrated in Figure 1.8.
Page 1-14 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
TANDBERG TANDBERG
UHF Monitoring
Terrestrial
Broadcast
Transmitter
Compression
System
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
Alteia Terrestrial Receiver
Figure 1.8: Typical Terrestrial Broadcast Monitoring Arrangement
1.5.2 What The Terrestrial Receiver Does
The Terrestrial Receiver can be tuned to a specified channel. The received channel may contain multiple services, therefore the Receivers demultiplexer is configured to select a single video service plus other audio/data components and present them at the output.
UHF Channels (COFDM)
Tune to required channel
Alteia Terrestrial Receiver
Select a service from the channel
Select components from the service
Multiple terrestrial channels
Multiple services on the tuned terrestrial channel
Multiple components on the selected service
Figure 1.9: What the Terrestrial Receiver Does
Video
Audio
RS-232 data
Transport Stream
1.5.3 Input Connections
The Terrestrial Receiver has UHF and Baseband COFDM interfaces.
They operate between 4.98 and 31.67 MSymbol/s.
NOTE…
Because the Alteia is used for monitoring, it is fitted with an internal 20 dB attenuator.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-15
Introduction
1.6 The Digital ENG Receiver
1.6.1 Typical Digital ENG System
The Digital ENG Receiver is a component of TANDBERG Television’s range of equipment. Figure 1.10 shows a typical use of the Digital ENG Receiver, however, the radio path may vary from that shown given that the Digital
ENG can be used in static or mobile configurations.
TANDBERG
Digital ENG
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
Radio Transmitter
TANDBERG
Figure 1.10: Typical Digital ENG Contribution System
TANDBERG
Radio Receiver
70 MHz
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
Alteia
Terrestrial Receiver
ALTEIA
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
1.6.2 Input Connections
The Digital ENG Receiver has a 70 MHz COFDM interface that operates between 4.98 and 31.67 MSymbol/s.
Alteia (Digital ENG) Receiver
ENG terrestrial channel
Tune to required channel
Select a service from the channel
Services on a 70 MHz IF input
Multiple services on the tuned terrestrial channel
Multiple components on the selected service
Select components from the Service
Video
Audio
RS-232 data
Transport Stream
Figure 1.11: What the Digital ENG Receiver Does
1.7 Alteia Control Modes
1.7.1 Introduction
The Alteia is designed for unattended operation. Once set up, it requires no further attention except to ensure the fan is working. There are up to three control modes associated with the Receiver (Local, Remote and Over-air control depending on the options fitted). The unit remains in the chosen control mode until another mode is requested.
Page 1-16 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
1.7.2 Local Control (via the Front Panel)
Normal (non-edit) State
To gain Local control of the Alteia, go to Menu #13, page 1. Select and save Local Only. The Normal state is the usual operating condition of the
Alteia. In this state, the MENU control can be used to scan the first page in each of the menus. The SELECT control, steps through the pages of the displayed menu.
Edit State
Local Control mode allows parameters to be entered and chosen using the
EDIT button and MENU/SELECT switches.
LOCAL (FRONT PANEL) CONTROL
MENU
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
STATUS
EDIT SAVE
SAVE : Stores parameters
EDIT: Off, aborts edit
MENU Switch: aborts edit
Timeout (3 mins): aborts edit
EDIT: On
MENU
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
STATUS
EDIT SAVE
Figure 1.12: Local Control – Front Panel
MENU Control
Edit On
SAVE
NORMAL
Any of the actions indicated will alter the Front Panel state, e.g. Edit On changes the panel state from Normal to Edit.
Edit Off
Timeout (3 mins)
Figure 1.13: Front Panel States
EDIT
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-17
Introduction
1.7.3 Remote Control
The unit enters this state when the R CTRL RS-232/485 port receives a configuration change command or the Remote control mode is selected on page 1 of the System Menu (#13). During this state, local commands are ignored. The REMOTE CTRL LED on the front panel remains lit to indicate that the control mode is Remote.
MENU
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
STATUS
EDIT SAVE
Figure 1.14: Remote Control Mode
If a modem is connected to the connector at the rear panel, it must be set to run at 9600 baud. A separate manual (ST.TS.E9200) is published which details the control protocol and syntax. This enables the user to develop software for PC remote control and is available from TANDBERG Television
Limited on request.
1.7.4 Director Over-air Control
With the VideoGuard Conditional Access software installed and a valid smart card inserted, an Alteia Satellite Receiver can be put into Over-air control mode. The following commands, except the control mode are then ignored:
·
LOCAL (Menu #13: Page 1 or CMO:LOM)
·
REMOTE (CMO:RCM)
The Alteia can be put into a LOCAL LOCKOUT condition. Once in this condition, there are two ways to recover control:
·
Cancelling the LOCAL LOCKOUT using an over-air command
·
Entering a PIN number via the System Menu (#13)
Either of these actions puts the Receiver into LOCAL control mode
Page 1-18 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
1.8 Guided Tour
1.8.1 Construction
The Receiver is constructed using a screened self-ventilated modular system; all operational inputs and outputs are via rear-panel connectors
(monitor outputs are available at the front panel). The unit may be operated freestanding or mounted in a 19 inch rack. 2U rack height is required, 1U for the equipment and a 1U ventilation panel above it.
1.8.2 Front Panel Controls
The front panel is fitted with a number of controls that are used to set up and monitor the unit. Information on the use of these controls is given in
Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment Locally. Figure 1.15 describes the controls.
MENU
EDIT SAVE
#1 STATUS
[message string]
[message string/editable field]
<n/04>
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
SELECT
LEFT RIGHT
EDIT / SAVE Buttons
Button Description
EDIT
SAVE
Pressing this for more than ½ second puts the unit in Local Control: Edit mode. A cursor appears below the currently selected menu item. Pressing this button a second time reverts the unit to Normal mode.
If there is no activity in this mode for five minutes, the unit reverts to Normal mode.
On power-up, pressing the EDIT button invokes the front panel test mode.
Used in EDIT mode, pressing this button saves any changed parameters and the unit reverts to Normal mode. This button has no effect when in Normal mode.
LEFT / RIGHT Buttons
Mode
Menu
Selection
Local
Director
Description
To enter the Engineering Menu (#14), press the
RIGHT button while rotating the MENU control clockwise from menu #13, System.
In the EDIT state, the LEFT / RIGHT button moves the cursor to the left / right.
Pressing the RIGHT button on power-up runs the inactive code stored in FLASH memory and makes it the active code from that point. The
RIGHT button will blink while the change is in progress. Updating of the front panel software after a software download is indicated by the
LEFT button blinking. The updating could take ten minutes and should not be interrupted.
MENU Control
Mode
Normal
Description
Scrolls through the local control and status
Menus. These are described in Annex C.
SELECT Control
Mode
Local
Description
The SELECT control selects the pages of the group selected by the MENU control. In EDIT mode, the SELECT control is used to scroll through options or increment values on an editable page in a Menu group.
Figure 1.15: Front Panel Controls
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-19
Introduction
1.8.3 Front Panel LEDs
Figure 1.16 shows the position and function of the LEDs on the front panel.
Some LEDs are dual colour. See Chapter 6, Preventive Maintenance and
Fault-finding for details of how to test the front panel LEDs.
SELECT
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
STATUS
MENU
EDIT SAVE
#1 STATUS
[message string]
[message string/editable field]
<n/04>
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
LEFT RIGHT
SAVE Button LED
Mode
Normal
Edit
Colour Description
—
Red
Not used.
Lit when in EDIT mode if any parameters have been changed.
EDIT Button LED
Mode
Power-up
Edit
Colour Description
Green
Green
Indicates that the unit is initialising.
Lit, by pressing the button, to indicate that unit is in EDIT mode if a displayed menu has an editable parameter.
LEFT Button LED (Local Control mode)
State
Normal
Edit
Colour
—
Green
Description
Not used.
Lit in EDIT mode, on an editable page, if the cursor is not under the left-most character.
RIGHT Button LED (Local Control mode)
State
Normal
Edit
Colour
—
Green
Description
Director only: On power-up, press the RIGHT button to run the inactive code stored in FLASH memory.
This then becomes the active code.
Press the RIGHT button and turn the SELECT control to access the
ENGINEERING menu.
Lit in EDIT mode, on an editable page, if the cursor is not under the right-most character.
STATUS Indicators
LED
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
Colour Description
Red
Red
Red
Green
Blinking
Green
Red
Summary alarm indication - see Chapter 4, Alarms.
Lit when the unit is in Remote or Director, Over-air control mode.
Lit when the selected programme is not authorised under conditional access or a BISS encoded stream is received with no Control Word.
Lit when an authorized VideoGuard, RAS or BISS encrypted signal is received.
Green LED blinks when incoming stream is encrypted using RAS1.
Lit when the unit has locked to the incoming signal.
Lit when the unit has not locked to the incoming signal.
Page 1-20
Figure 1.16: Alteia Front Panel Indicators
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Introduction
The LEDs on the front panel indicate the equipment status. The two LED colours used in this equipment are red and green. Red indicates a fault condition, e.g. a missing or faulty input signal. All red alarm LEDs should be off for correct operation, although some may be on during power-up.
NOTE…
The REMOTE LED is the exception to this as it is ON (red) to indicate that the unit is in either
REMOTE or Director OVER-AIR control mode.
Green indicates correct conditions and correct system functioning.
1.8.4 Bit Error Ratio Meter
All Alteia models excluding the M2/PDU/9xx variants are fitted with a Bit
Error Ratio (BER) status meter. This gives an indication of the robustness of the incoming signal.
The meter shows BER in a range between 10
-1
and 10
-5
. The red line displayed on the meter indicates that the BER is high and decoding may be prevented. As the needle moves to the right (further into the green area of the scale), fewer errors are being received due to fading, interference etc.
Figure 1.17: BER Status Meter
NOTES...
1. Models M2/PTR/9xx (Terrestrial Receivers) dynamically display the current Post-Viterbi BER value on the front panel BER meter.
2. Models M2/PDU/9xx (Decoders) are not fitted with a BER meter.
1.8.5 Audio and Video Monitoring
Three connectors provide monitoring points for the analogue video and the two analogue, audio output channels.
Figure 1.18: Audio and Video Monitoring
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 1-21
Introduction
1.8.6 Conditional Access and Scrambling Options
VideoGuard
There is a slot on the front panel to allow the insertion of a Conditional
Access (CA) card for the VideoGuard system.
RAS 1 and 2
With the appropriate configuration, the Alteia fully descrambles Remote
Authorisation System (RAS) input transport stream. The ability to decrypt all the components in any other transport stream is a function of the specific CA system decryption.
BISS (ver 2.8 and Later)
Please contact TANDBERG Television Customer Services regarding the use of BISS equipment.
NOTE…
Conditional Access is not available in M2/PTR models.
1.8.7 Rear Panel
Inputs and outputs to the unit, except monitoring, are taken via the rear panel. Figure 1.19 shows a typical Satellite Receiver rear panel.
Connector descriptions are given in Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment.
Figure 1.19: Alteia Satellite Receiver Rear Panel
Page 1-22 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Chapter 2
2.
Installing the Equipment
Contents
2.1 Read This First!......................................................... 2-3
2.1.1 Handling........................................................ 2-3
2.1.2 Installing the Equipment ............................... 2-3
2.1.3 Lifting ............................................................ 2-3
2.2 Preliminary Checks ................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Mechanical Inspection .................................. 2-3
2.2.2 Moving the Equipment Safely....................... 2-3
2.3 Installing the Equipment............................................ 2-4
2.3.1 Fixing ............................................................ 2-4
2.3.2 Ventilation..................................................... 2-4
Openings in the Covers ................................ 2-4
Care in Positioning........................................ 2-4
Protection from Moisture............................... 2-4
2.3.3 Installing Cables - Safety.............................. 2-5
2.3.4 Outdoor Antenna (Receivers Only)............... 2-5
Lightning Protection...................................... 2-5
Power Lines.................................................. 2-5
2.4 EMC Compliance Statements ................................... 2-6
2.4.1 EN 55022/AS/NZS 3548............................... 2-6
2.4.2 FCC .............................................................. 2-6
2.5 AC Supply Operating Voltage, Fusing/Safety
Information ................................................................ 2-6
2.5.1 AC Power Supply.......................................... 2-6
2.5.2 AC Power Supply Cord................................. 2-7
General......................................................... 2-7
Wire Colours................................................. 2-7
2.5.3 Use of the Mains Cable Retaining Clip (if fitted)............................................................. 2-8
2.5.4 Connecting the Equipment to the AC
Power Supply................................................ 2-8
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
2.6 Technical Earth Connection ......................................2-8
2.7 Signal Connections....................................................2-9
2.7.1 General .........................................................2-9
2.7.2 Input Connectors, By Alteia Model..............2-11
PDU Decoder..............................................2-11
P8R Satellite Receiver QPSK/8PSK ...........2-13
PSR Satellite Receiver QPSK /BPSK..........2-14
PTR Terrestrial Receiver.............................2-15
PTRE Digital ENG Receiver........................2-16
Frame Sync Connector (Alteia plus Only)...2-16
2.7.3 Output Connectors, By Connector Type .....2-17
Transport Stream Output ............................2-17
Digital Video Output ....................................2-18
Analogue Video Output...............................2-18
Video Out 2 .................................................2-18
Video Test Connector, Front Panel.............2-19
Analogue Audio Outputs .............................2-19
Digital Audio Outputs ..................................2-20
Audio #1, #2 L&R (Front Panel) ..................2-21
2.7.4 Control Connectors .....................................2-21
RS-422 Data ...............................................2-21
RS-232 Data ...............................................2-22
Remote Control...........................................2-23
Auxiliary Relays Interface............................2-24
2.7.5 Option Module Connectors .........................2-24
Page 2-1
Installing the Equipment
List of Figures
Figure 2.1: Air flow Through the Equipment...................................2-4
Figure 2.2: AC Power Inlet and Fuse .............................................2-7
Figure 2.3: Mains Cable Retaining Clip..........................................2-8
Figure 2.4: Location of the Technical Earth....................................2-9
Figure 2.5: 8PSK Satellite Receiver Rear Panel ............................2-9
Figure 2.6: QPSK/BPSK Input Panel .............................................2-9
Figure 2.7: Alteia and Alteia plus Connections.............................2-10
Figure 2.8: FRAME SYNC Connector, Location...........................2-16
Figure 2.9: Arrangement of Digital and Analogue Audio
Connectors..................................................................2-20
Figure 2.10: Aux Relay Interface with Cable Connector
Removed.....................................................................2-24
List of Tables
Table 2.1: Fuse Information........................................................... 2-7
Table 2.2: Supply Cord Wiring Colours ......................................... 2-7
Table 2.3: Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colours..................... 2-8
Table 2.4: DVB-ASI Fibre-optic Connector.................................. 2-11
Table 2.5: DVB-ASI Copper Connector ........................................ 2-11
Table 2.6: DVB-SPI Parallel Input Connector.............................. 2-12
Table 2.7: QPSK/8PSK Connector (P8R Satellite Receiver, Lband) .......................................................................... 2-13
Table 2.8: QPSK Connector (PSR Satellite Receiver, L-band)... 2-14
Table 2.9: RF Input Connector (PTR Terrestrial Receiver) ......... 2-15
Table 2.10: Baseband Input Connector (Terrestrial Receiver).... 2-15
Table 2.11: IF Input Connector (PTRE Digital ENG)................... 2-16
Table 2.12: Frame Sync Connector Specification ....................... 2-17
Table 2.13: DVB-SPI Parallel Transport Stream Output
Connector................................................................... 2-17
Table 2.14: Digital Video Output Connector................................ 2-18
Table 2.15: Analogue Video Output Connector........................... 2-18
Table 2.16: Video Test Connector, Front Panel .......................... 2-19
Table 2.17: Analogue Audio Output Connector (XLR) ................ 2-19
Table 2.18: Digital Audio Output Connector (XLR)...................... 2-20
Table 2.19: Audio Monitor, Front Panel....................................... 2-21
Table 2.20: RS-422 High-speed Data Connector........................ 2-21
Table 2.21: RS-232 Low-speed Data Connector......................... 2-22
Table 2.22: Remote Control Connector....................................... 2-23
Table 2.23: Auxiliary Relays Interface......................................... 2-24
Page 2-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
2.1 Read This First!
2.1.1 Handling
The Alteia must be handled and installed carefully and thoughtfully to prevent safety hazards and damage.
2.1.2 Installing the Equipment
Ensure the personnel designated to fit the unit have the appropriate skills and knowledge. If in any doubt, contact Customer Services
(see Preliminary Pages for contact details).
Installation of the product should follow these instructions, and should only use installation accessories recommended by the manufacturers. When rack-mounted, this equipment must have shelf supports in addition to the front panel fixings.
Do not use this product as a support for any other equipment.
2.1.3 Lifting
Although this product only weighs approximately 4 kg (8.8 lbs), in some circumstances it might be awkward to lift. In which case, do not attempt to lift or move it without proper assistance or equipment. If in doubt, get help.
2.2 Preliminary Checks
2.2.1 Mechanical Inspection
Inspect the equipment for damage-in-transit. If in doubt, please contact
TANDBERG Television Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages).
WARNING…
REMOVING THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT MAY INVALIDATE ANY WARRANTIES, CAUSE A
SAFETY HAZARD OR/AND AFFECT THE EMC PERFORMANCE. CHECK WITH TANDBERG
TELEVISION CUSTOMER SERVICES.
2.2.2 Moving the Equipment Safely
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, bracket or table recommended by TANDBERG Television Ltd.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Do not move or carry the equipment whilst it is still connected to the supply or other leads, is live, or is in operation.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-3
Installing the Equipment
2.3 Installing the Equipment
2.3.1 Fixing
The Alteia is designed for fixed use only and has been shipped with fixing brackets suitable for a standard 19 inch rack. When installed in a rack, it should be secured using the fixing brackets. In addition, support shelves must be used to reduce the weight on the brackets. Ensure it is firmly and safely located and it has an adequate flow of free-air.
A freestanding unit should be installed on a secure horizontal surface where it is unlikely to be knocked or its connectors and leads disturbed.
2.3.2 Ventilation
Openings in the Covers
Openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. These ensure reliable operation of the product and protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered.
Air is drawn into the interior through vents at the side and top of the unit.
Air is drawn out of the interior by a fan.
Figure 2.1: Air flow Through the Equipment
Care in Positioning
CAUTIONS...
1. The fan contained within this unit is not fitted with a dust/insect filter. Pay attention to the environment in which it is to be used.
2. Do not install units so that the air intake of one aligns with the outlet on another. Provide baffles and adequate spacing.
The Alteia should never be placed near or over a radiator or other source of heat. It should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a rack unless proper ventilation is provided and the instructions have been adhered to.
Allow at least 50 mm free air space at each side of the equipment to ensure adequate cooling. Units in racks can be stacked with a 1U ventilation panel between. Racks containing stacked equipment may need additional air handling to keep the operating ambient temperature within specified limits.
Protection from Moisture
Do not install this equipment in areas of high humidity or where there is a danger of water ingress.
Page 2-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
2.3.3 Installing Cables - Safety
Power supply cables should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cables at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Do not run ac power cables in the same duct as signal leads. Do not move or install equipment whilst it is still attached to the mains supply. Ensure safety and ESD precautions are observed whilst inter-connecting equipment.
2.3.4 Outdoor Antenna (Receivers Only)
Lightning Protection
WARNING...
IF THE RECEIVER HAS BEEN SUBJECT TO A LIGHTNING STRIKE OR POWER SURGE WHICH
HAS STOPPED IT WORKING, DISCONNECT THE POWER IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT REAPPLY
POWER UNTIL IT HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR SAFETY. IF IN DOUBT, CONTACT TANDBERG
TELEVISION CUSTOMER SERVICES.
Where appropriate, ensure this product has an adequate level of lightning protection. Alternatively, during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the supply outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges.
NOTE…
Terrestrial Receivers (M2/PTR[E]) are fitted with a 20 dB RF input attenuator.
Power Lines
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.
WARNING…
WHEN INSTALLING AN OUTSIDE ANTENNA SYSTEM, EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO
AVOID TOUCHING POWER LINES OR CIRCUITS AS CONTACT WITH THEM MAY BE FATAL.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-5
Installing the Equipment
2.4 EMC Compliance Statements
1
2.4.1 EN 55022/AS/NZS 3548
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to prevent interference.
2.4.2 FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
2.5 AC Supply Operating Voltage, Fusing/Safety
Information
2.5.1 AC Power Supply
The Alteia operates from an auto-ranging mains power supply
(100-120 Vac or 220-240 Vac 50/60 Hz nominal) and is designed for use in ambient air temperature in the range 0°C to +40°C. There are no links etc. to be altered for operation from different supply voltages. The full
Technical Specification is given in Annex B, Technical Specification.
WARNINGS…
1. THE ALTEIA SHOULD ONLY BE OPERATED FROM THE TYPE OF POWER SOURCE
INDICATED ON THE MARKING LABEL. IF YOU ARE NOT SURE OF THE TYPE TO YOUR
BUSINESS, CONSULT YOUR APPLIANCE DEALER OR LOCAL POWER COMPANY. DO NOT
OVERLOAD WALL OUTLETS AND EXTENSION CORDS AS THIS CAN RESULT IN A RISK OF
FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK. AC SUPPLY.
2. THE ALTEIA RANGE OF RECEIVERS AND DECODERS ARE NOT FITTED WITH AN AC
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH. ENSURE THE SUPPLY SOCKET OUTLET IS INSTALLED OR
LOCATED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT IS ACCESSIBLE.
1
The EMC information was correct at the time of manufacture. The EMC tests were performed with the Technical
Earth attached.
Page 2-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
Mains Supply Inlet
Fuse carrier
Figure 2.2: AC Power Inlet and Fuse
Table 2.1: Fuse Information
Item Specification
Fuse
Fuse type
Fuse rating
Single pole, fitted in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit.
5 mm x 20 mm anti-surge (T) HBC, IEC127 (sheet v)
1.6 A
Fuse rated voltage 250 Vac
Power lead connector fuse (if appropriate) 5 A
NOTE...
See Annex B, Technical Specification for more fuse information.
2.5.2 AC Power Supply Cord
General
A two-metre mains supply cord is supplied with this product. It is fitted with a moulded plug suitable to the address of the recipient customer.
NOTE...
The Alteia is not fitted with an ac power supply ON/OFF switch. Ensure that the socket-outlet supplying the equipment is installed near the equipment so that it is easily accessible.
Wire Colours
The wires in the supply cord are coloured as shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2: Supply Cord Wiring Colours
Earth:
Neutral:
Live:
UK (BS 1363)
Green-and-yellow
Blue
Brown
EUROPE (CEE 7/7)
Green-and-yellow
Blue
Brown
USA (NEMA 5-15P)
Green
White
Black
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-7
Installing the Equipment
If the colours
2
do not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in a locally supplied plug, proceed as in Table 2.3. The inclusion of Table 2.3 is for reference.
Table 2.3: Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colours
Wire Colour (UK)
green-and-yellow blue brown
Action
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or the safety earth symbol or coloured green or green-and-yellow.
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured black.
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured red.
2.5.3 Use of the Mains Cable Retaining Clip (if fitted)
Ensure the retaining clip is present before powering the unit.
Mains Supply Inlet
Retaining clip
NOTE…
The mains cable retainer assembly is not fitted from unit serial number 4800.
Figure 2.3: Mains Cable Retaining Clip
WARNINGS…
3. ATTEMPTING TO CONNECT THE CABLE TO THE MAINS INLET WITH THE RETAINING CLIP
NOT PRESENT MAY, IN SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, LEAD TO A SAFETY HAZARD.
4. IF THE MAINS CABLE RETAINER ASSEMBLY ALWAYS IS FITTED, ENSURE THE CLIP IS
PRESENT BEFORE CONNECTING THE POWER LEAD TO THE UNIT.
2.5.4 Connecting the Equipment to the AC Power Supply
As there is no mains power switch fitted to this unit, ensure the local ac power supply is switched OFF before connecting the supply cord.
Connect the mains lead to the Alteia and then to the local supply.
2.6 Technical Earth Connection
The terminal marked at the rear panel is a Technical Earth It is provided to:
1. Ensure all equipment chassis fixed within a rack are at the same technical earth potential. To do this, connect a wire between the
Technical Earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack
2
BS 415 : 1990 - Safety Requirements for Mains-operated Electronic and Related Apparatus for Household and
Similar General Use.
Page 2-8 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
2. Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between equipment.
The Technical Earth provides a suitable connection between the Alteia and the installation to give a low impedance path at normal operating frequencies.
NOTE…
Early versions were not fitted with a Technical Earth connection.
Technical Earth Post
Figure 2.4: Location of the Technical Earth
2.7 Signal Connections
2.7.1 General
CAUTION...
It is strongly recommended that the terminal marked at the rear panel of the equipment is connected to a site Technical Earth before any external connections are made and the equipment is powered. This limits the migration of stray charges.
All signal connections are made via the rear panel. A typical rear panel is shown in Figure 2.5. The connections are also shown schematically in
Figure 2.7. A full technical specification is given in Annex B.
Input arrangement is model dependent.
Position of Option Module connectors (if fitted)
Figure 2.5: 8PSK Satellite Receiver Rear Panel
Figure 2.6 shows the input panel of a QPSK/BPSK Satellite Receiver.
Figure 2.6: QPSK/BPSK Input Panel
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-9
Installing the Equipment
2 inputs:
Satellite Receivers
M2/PSR/932
M2/P8R/942A[C][D]
L-band Input #1
L-band Input #2
4 inputs:
Satellite Receivers
M2/PSR/942[A][B][C][D]
M2/PSR/932C
Decoders
M2/PDU/942[B]
L-band Input #3
L-band Input #4
Parallel Transport Stream
Serial Transport Stream
Serial Transport Stream
Decoder
M2/PDU/942C[D]
Parallel Transport Stream
Serial Transport Stream
Serial Transport Stream
Terrestrial Receiver
M2/PTR/94x[A][C][CVL]
Digital ENG Receiver
M2/PTRE/94x[C][CVL]
UHF COFDM
Baseband COFDM
70 MHz IF Input
Frame Sync (Alteia plus models only)
Remote Control
Mains Input
Technical Earth
Inputs
#1
#2
#3
#4
SPI
ASI-C
ASI-O
Receivers and Decoders
Outputs
MPEG-2 SPI-TSO
DIGITAL VIDEO
ANALOG VIDEO
ANALOG VIDEO 2
AUDIO #1 LEFT
AUDIO #1 RIGHT/AES/EBU
AUDIO #2 LEFT
AUDIO #2 RIGHT/AES/EBU
RS-232 DATA
RS-422 DATA
SPI
ASI-C
ASI-C
ALM
Å
Å
Å
RF INPUT
BASEBAND INPUT
IF Input
FRAME SYNC
(Ateia plus models)
AGC
#1
AUX
#2
#3
AUX
#4
#5
AUX
#6
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
R CTRL
Located at the
Front Panel
RS-232/485
Auto-ranging PSU
VIDEO TEST
AUDIO #1 L&R
AUDIO #2 L&R
ASI OPTION
MODULE
ASI-O
Technical Earth
ASI-C
Parallel Transport Stream
M2/Pxx/94x models
All models
Analogue: All models
Digital: M2/Pxx/94x models
Analogue: All models
Digital: M2/Pxx/94x models
Low speed Async Data,
All models
High speed Sync Data
(Available on A variants and Alteia plus models)
Summary Alarm: All models
AGC (PSR and P8R models)
Auxiliary contacts are allocated by Menu #5
(See Chapter 4, Alarms)
Analogue monitoring outputs
(All models)
Optical
Asynchronous Serial Interface
Copper
Asynchronous Serial Interface
Figure 2.7: Alteia and Alteia plus Connections
Page 2-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
2.7.2 Input Connectors, By Alteia Model
PDU Decoder
Models Covered
Table 2.4 applies to models M2/PDU/942 and M2/PDU/942B only.
ASI Fibre-optic Input
This port is used to provide an ASI compliant fibre-optic connection at a fixed line transmission rate of 270 Mbit/s.
This input is activated through the Decoder Input menu #4. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.12.
WARNING…
LASER: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTE…
The Class 1 LASER warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
Table 2.4: DVB-ASI Fibre-optic Connector
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Fibre optic cable
Cable attenuation
Cable length
Specification
SC type
ASI-O
Multimode 65.2/125 mm
1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm maximum
£2.66 km
ASI Copper Input
Provides a DVB compliant copper connection on the M2/PDU/942[B][C][D] models.
This input is activated through the Decoder Input menu #4. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.13.
The input is byte-mode only for M2/PDU/942[B]. It is byte-mode and single packet burst mode for M2/PDU/942C[D].
Table 2.5: DVB-ASI Copper Connector
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Cable specification
Pin Centre
Shield
Specification
BNC, Female 75 W
ASI-C capable of transmitting a maximum frequency of 850 MHz
Signal
Ground/Chassis
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-11
Installing the Equipment
DVB-SPI Transport Stream In
This connector on the models
M2/PDU/942[B][C][D], provides a
DVB-SPI parallel input. For DVB parallel working, connect the input Transport
Stream to the appropriate transport input connector.
13
25
This input is activated through the Decoder Input menu #4. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.11.
Table 2.6: DVB-SPI Parallel Input Connector
Item
Connector Type
Connector Designation
Pin-outs:
Specification
25-way, D-type female
DVB SPI
Pin 1 ¾ BYTE_CLOCK (+)
Pin 2 ¾ 0V
Pin 3 ¾ DATA_7 (+)
Pin 4
¾ DATA_6 (+)
Pin 5 ¾ DATA_5 (+)
Pin 6 ¾ DATA_4 (+)
Pin 7 ¾ DATA_3 (+)
Pin 8
¾ DATA_2 (+)
Pin 9 ¾ DATA_1 (+)
Pin 10 ¾ DATA_0 (+)
Pin 11 ¾ DVALID (+)
Pin 12 ¾ PKT_SYNC (+)
Pin 13 ¾ PROT GND
Pin 14 ¾ BYTE_CLOCK (-)
Pin 15 ¾ 0V
Pin 16 ¾ DATA_7 (-)
Pin 17
¾ DATA_6 (-)
Pin 18 ¾ DATA_5 (-)
Pin 19 ¾ DATA_4 (-)
Pin 20 ¾ DATA_3 (-)
Pin 21
¾ DATA_2 (-)
Pin 22 ¾ DATA_1 (-)
Pin 23 ¾ DATA_0 (-)
Pin 24 ¾ DVALID (-)
Pin 25 ¾ PKT_SYNC (-)
14
1
Page 2-12 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
P8R Satellite Receiver QPSK/8PSK
Models
Table 2.7 applies to models M2/P8R/942[A][B][C][D]
#1 - #2 (L-band Inputs)
Connect the L-band output of a suitable LNB to the
Type F connector either directly or via a suitable attenuator giving adequate consideration to lightning and surge protection - see Section 2.3.4, Outdoor
Antenna. The active input is chosen using the Satellite
Input Menu (#4).
#n
In most cases an attenuator will not be required, but one should be used where:
·
The required input signal exceeds the specified maximum permissible level (-25 dBm).
·
The downlead is a short length of low-loss cable and the LNB in use has a poor return loss (7 dB min).
·
The Receiver is receiving one of many carriers in a multi-carrier FDM system and the required signal is close to the specified maximum permissible level.
The specification for this connector is given in Table B.14.
Table 2.7: QPSK/8PSK Connector (P8R Satellite Receiver, L-band)
Input
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
LNB Supply
Impedance
Specification
F type, Female
Two connectors: #1 to #2
RF Input
Ground/Chassis
Refer to Caution box below
75 W
CAUTIONS...
1. The Receiver provides dc power to drive an LNB, via the active L-band input connector. Do not connect equipment other than an LNB to this connector. Failure to do this may result in damage to the external equipment.
2. The F-type connector is not suitable for repeated connection and disconnection. If it is intended to use the Receiver in this way, fit a sacrificial connector and make connections to it.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-13
Installing the Equipment
PSR Satellite Receiver QPSK /BPSK
Models
Table 2.8 applies to models M2/PSR/9xx[A][B][C][D]
#1 - #4 (L-band Inputs)
Connect the L-band output of a suitable LNB to the Type
F connector either directly or via a suitable attenuator giving adequate consideration to lightning and surge protection - see Section 2.3.4, Outdoor Antenna. The active input is chosen using the Satellite Input Menu
(#4).
#n
In most cases an attenuator will not be required, but one should be used where:
·
The required input signal exceeds the specified maximum permissible level (-25 dBm).
·
The downlead is a short length of low-loss cable and the LNB in use has a poor return loss (7 dB min).
·
The Receiver is receiving one of many carriers in a multi-carrier FDM system and the required signal is close to the specified maximum permissible level.
The specification for this connector is given in Table B.15.
Table 2.8: QPSK Connector (PSR Satellite Receiver, L-band)
Input
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin:
LNB Supply
Impedance
Centre
Shield
Specification
F type, Female
Four connectors: #1 to #4 (M2/PSR/932C, M2/PSR/942[A][B][C][D])
Two connectors: #1 to #2 (M2/PSR/932)
RF Input
Ground/Chassis
Refer to Caution box below
75 W
CAUTIONS...
1. The Receiver provides dc power to drive an LNB, via the active L-band input connector. Do not connect equipment other than an LNB to this connector. Failure to do this may result in damage to the external equipment.
2. The F-type connector is not suitable for repeated connection and disconnection. If it is intended to use the Receiver in this way, fit a sacrificial connector and make connections to it.
Page 2-14 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
PTR Terrestrial Receiver
RF Input
Table 2.9 applies to models M2/PTR/942 and M2/PTR/948[A]
A BNC socket provides a connection for the UHF output of a suitable aerial to the RF INPUT connector.
This model has a 20 dB attenuator fitted to the input of the tuner. It should be removed if greater sensitivity is required.
This input is activated through the Terrestrial Receiver
Input menu #4. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.19.
RF INPUT
Table 2.9: RF Input Connector (PTR Terrestrial Receiver)
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
Impedance
Specification
BNC Female
RF INPUT
RF Input
Ground/Chassis
50 W (nominal)
Baseband Input
A single-ended, 75 W BNC socket on the M2/PTR/942 and M2/PTR/948[A] models, provides a baseband input of 7.612 MHz bandwidth with a centre frequency of 4.571 MHz. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.21.
Table 2.10: Baseband Input Connector (Terrestrial Receiver)
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
Impedance
Specification
BNC Female
BASEBAND INPUT
RF Input
Ground/Chassis
50 W (nominal)
BASEBAND INPUT
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-15
Installing the Equipment
PTRE Digital ENG Receiver
IF Input
Table 2.11 applies to models M2/PTRE/942, M2/PTRE/948C and
M2/PTRE/948CVL
A BNC socket provides a connection for the IF output of a suitable SHF radio Receiver to the IF INPUT connector, either directly or via a suitable attenuator giving adequate consideration to lightning and surge protection - see Section 2.3.4, Outdoor Antenna.
In most cases an attenuator is not required. One should be used if the wanted input level or the adjacent channel PAL signals are greater than
20 dBm.
IF INPUT
This input is activated through the Digital ENG Input menu #4. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.22.
Table 2.11: IF Input Connector (PTRE Digital ENG)
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
Impedance
Specification
BNC Female
IF INPUT
RF Input
Ground/Chassis
75 W (nominal)
Frame Sync Connector (Alteia plus Only)
This is a purchasable option (M2/PRO/SYNC) for Alteia plus models.
Frame sync is an input that will accept a video signal containing burst and sync at either 525 or 625 line standard (the line standard must match that of the video signal being decoded). The decoded video in the Alteia plus is locked to a local video source at a head-end or other installation where multiple units are working together. It ensures that a number of IRDs are running at the same frame rate since they would all be locked to a common reference. The Frame Sync is activated through the Video menu
#6 if the option has been purchased.
The specification for this connector is given in Table B.23.
FRAME SYNC
(OPTION)
Page 2-16
Figure 2.8: FRAME SYNC Connector, Location
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
CAUTION…
The frame sync input is high impedance and can be daisy-chained with a termination at the last unit.
However, the signal quality should then be verified at the last unit.
Table 2.12: Frame Sync Connector Specification
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Connections: Pin
Shield
Impedance
Specification
BNC Female
FRAME SYNC
Analogue sync pulse (black level) or composite video signal
Ground/Chassis
High
2.7.3 Output Connectors, By Connector Type
Transport Stream Output
This connector provides a DVB-SPI parallel Transport Stream output.
The specification for this connector is given in Table B.24.
13
25
MPEG-2 SPI-TSO
NOTES…
1. For the M2/PDU/942C model: the SPI output is only valid if the input to the Decoder is also of
SPI format, otherwise it is invalid and unusable. The Decoder does not act as an ASI to SPI converter.
2. An ASI output option module is available, see Chapter 5, Options.
14
1
Table 2.13: DVB-SPI Parallel Transport Stream Output Connector
Item
Connector Type
Connector Designation
Pin-outs:
Specification
25-way, D-type, Female
MPEG-2 SPI-TSO
Pin 1 ¾ BYTE_CLOCK (+)
Pin 2 ¾ 0V
Pin 3 ¾ DATA_7 (+)
Pin 4
¾ DATA_6 (+)
Pin 5 ¾ DATA_5 (+)
Pin 6 ¾ DATA_4 (+)
Pin 7 ¾ DATA_3 (+)
Pin 8
¾ DATA_2 (+)
Pin 9 ¾ DATA_1 (+)
Pin 10 ¾ DATA_0 (+)
Pin 11 ¾ DVALID (+)
Pin 12
¾ PKT_SYNC (+)
Pin 13 ¾ PROT GND
Pin 14 ¾ BYTE_CLOCK (-)
Pin 15 ¾ 0V
Pin 16 ¾ DATA_7 (-)
Pin 17
¾ DATA_6 (-)
Pin 18 ¾ DATA_5 (-)
Pin 19 ¾ DATA_4 (-)
Pin 20 ¾ DATA_3 (-)
Pin 21
¾ DATA_2 (-)
Pin 22 ¾ DATA_1 (-)
Pin 23 ¾ DATA_0 (-)
Pin 24 ¾ DVALID (-)
Pin 25
¾ PKT_SYNC (-)
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-17
Installing the Equipment
Digital Video Output
Table 2.14 applies to M2/Pxx/94x Models only.
This BNC socket provides a digital video output.
Video control is through the Video menu #6. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.26.
Table 2.14: Digital Video Output Connector
Item
Connector type
Output format
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
Impedance
Specification
M2/Pxx/93x models: not included
M2/Pxx/94x models: 1 x BNC, Female
ITU-R BT.656
DIGITAL VIDEO
Video output
Ground/Chassis
75 W
Analogue Video Output
This BNC socket provides an analogue composite video output. The output standard is configured using the
Video Menu (#6). The specification for this connector is given in Table B.25.
Table 2.15: Analogue Video Output Connector
DIGITAL VIDEO
ANALOG VIDEO
Item
Connector type
Output format
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
Impedance
Specification
Alteia models: 2 x BNC, Female - both carry the same video signal.
Alteia plus models: 1 x BNC, 75 W, Female – carrying Video, the 2 nd connector if the option is purchased, else it is VIDEO OUT 2.
BNC is the FRAME SYNC
625 = PAL-B, -G, -I, -M (fully supported on D variants only) -N Combination or N Normal
525 = NTSC-M with pedestal, -M without pedestal (chosen in Menu #6)
ANALOG VIDEO, VIDEO OUT 2
Video output
Ground/Chassis
75 W
Video Out 2
Where the Frame Sync option has not been purchased, this connector is a second video output identified as
VIDEO OUT 2. The specifications in Table 2.15 apply to this connector.
VIDEO Out 2
Page 2-18 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
Video Test Connector, Front Panel
This BNC socket provides an analogue composite video test output. The output format is the same as the analogue video output on the rear panel.
The specification for this connector is given in
Table B.27.
Table 2.16: Video Test Connector, Front Panel
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin Connections
Nominal output impedance
Load impedance
VIDEO TEST
Item
Connector type
Output format
Connector designation
Connection: Pin
Shield
Impedance
Specification
BNC, 75 W, Female
As the rear panel analogue video output (chosen by menu)
VIDEO TEST
Video output
Ground/Chassis
75 W
Analogue Audio Outputs
Four XLR male connectors provide two stereo channels. Each connector carries a single channel of a stereo pair. The output can be varied according to service and unit configuration.
Audio control is through the Audio menu #8.
The specification for this connector is given in Table B.28.
Table 2.17: Analogue Audio Output Connector (XLR)
1 2 1
3
AUDIO #1(2) LEFT
3
AUDIO #1(2)
RIGHT/AES/EBU
2
Specification
XLR, Male
AUDIO #1 LEFT, AUDIO #1 RIGHT
AUDIO #2 LEFT, AUDIO #2 RIGHT
Pin 1 External of cable (shield/ground)
Pin 2 Live (Hot/+ve phase)
Pin 3 Return (Cold/-ve phase)
50 W
³600 W balanced
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-19
Installing the Equipment
Digital Audio Outputs
Table 2.18 applies to M2/Pxx/942[A][B][C][D] Models only.
Two XLR male connectors provide two stereo channels. The output can be formatted according to the received service and unit configuration.
Audio control is through the Audio menu #8. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.29.
1
Table 2.18: Digital Audio Output Connector (XLR)
3
AUDIO #1(2)
RIGHT/AES/EBU
2
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin Connections
Nominal output impedance
Load impedance
Specification
XLR, Male
AUDIO #1 RIGHT/AES/EBU
AUDIO #2 RIGHT/AES/EBU
Pin 1 Xternal of cable (shield/ground)
Pin 2 Live (Hot/+ve phase)
Pin 3 Return (Cold/-ve phase)
50 W
110
W balanced
Units with Digital Audio outputs are also capable of providing Analogue
Audio. The connectors are arranged as shown in Figure 2.9. Choice of output is made using the Audio Menus (#8).
Analogue Stereo 1
6447448
Analogue Stereo 2
6447448
14243
Digital Stereo 1
14243
Digital Stereo 2
Figure 2.9: Arrangement of Digital and Analogue Audio Connectors
NOTE...
When the digital output is used, the corresponding Audio-left connector is unused.
Further information regarding the AES/EBU digital outputs can be found in
Table B-29 and Table C-19.
Page 2-20 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
Audio #1, #2 L&R (Front Panel)
This is a ¼” jack socket, which provides an analogue audio monitoring output. The format of this output is the same as the analogue audio output at the rear of the unit.
The specification for this connector is given in
Table B.30.
Table 2.19: Audio Monitor, Front Panel
AUDIO #1 (#2)
L&R
Item
Connector type
Output format
Connector designation
Connections: Tip
Ring
Collar
Impedance
Specification
¼” jack socket
Same as the rear panel, analogue audio output (chosen by menu).
AUDIO #1 (#2) L&R
Audio Left output
Audio Right output
Screen/Ground (chassis)
600 W
2.7.4 Control Connectors
RS-422 Data
The connector provides a synchronous serial communications interface for the reception of high-speed synchronous data.
The status of the data output on this connector is given in the Data menu #11.
The specification for this connector is given in
Table B.33.
8
15
RS-422 DATA
9
1
NOTE…
The RS-422 High-speed Synchronous Data output is available on all models except M2/PSR/932C and those without a suffix letter.
CAUTION…
Pins 2 and 9 of the RS-422 15-way D-type are used for field upgrade. Connection to these pins by equipment not supplied by field service personnel could result in damage to the unit.
Always ensure that RS-422 cables are connected according to the pin-outs described in Table 2.20.
Table 2.20: RS-422 High-speed Data Connector
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin-outs
Specification
15-way D-type, Female
RS-422 DATA
Pin 1 ¾ Ground
Pin 4 ¾ DATA (+)
Pin 6 ¾ CLOCK (+)
Pin 8 ¾ GROUND
Pin 11 ¾ DATA (-)
Pin 13 ¾ CLOCK (-)
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-21
Installing the Equipment
RS-232 Data
A 9-way, D-type female connector provides an asynchronous serial communications interface for the reception of low-speed data.
The status of the data output on this connector is given in the Data menu #11. The specification for this connector is given in Table B.32.
Table 2.21: RS-232 Low-speed Data Connector
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Standards
Configuration
Pin-outs
Specification
9-way D-type, Female
RS-232 DATA
RS-232 DATA
DCE
Pin 1 ¾ Not used
Pin 2 ¾ Receive Data (RxD)
Pin 3 ¾ Not Used
Pin 5 ¾ Ground
Pin 6 ¾ Not used
Pin 7 ¾ Not used
Pin 8
¾ Not used
Pin 9 ¾ Not used
1 5
6 9
RS-232 DATA
Page 2-22 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Installing the Equipment
Remote Control
Connect a PC to the connector labelled
R CTRL RS-232/485 at the rear panel of the equipment. The System Menu (#13, page 4) is used to switch between the RS-232 and RS-485 input standards. Page 6-6, Section 6.4.7 refers to this connector.
The specification for this connector is given in
Table B.36.
The Remote Control Protocol is published in manual
ST.TS.E9200.
Table 2.22: Remote Control Connector
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin-outs
Specification
3
4
5
Pin
1
2
8
9
6
7
9-way D-type, Male
R CTRL RS-232/485
RS-232
Data Carrier Detected (DCD)
Receive Data (RxD)
Transmit Data (TxD)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Ground
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
Not connected
Direction
Input
Input output output
— input output input
—
1 5
6 9
R CTRL RS-232/485
RS-485
3
4
5
Pin
1
2
8
9
6
7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Rx
Ground
Not Tx
Tx
Not Rx
Not connected
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 2-23
Installing the Equipment
Auxiliary Relays Interface
The Auxiliary Relays interface is carried on a 12-way socket that has an accompanying screw-terminal fanning-strip. The interface primarily consists of a number of relays. Each relay provides a contact that is taken to the interface connector. An internal jumper sets the contact to be normally-open (default) or closed to ground. Alarm Menu #5 allocates alarms to the relay contacts.
Alteia Satellite Receivers have an AGC connector that provides an output voltage referenced to ground for use with automatic antenna pointing systems. The voltage is an isolated sample of the Receiver’s AGC. Shorting this output to ground does not affect the unit’s performance.
AUX AGC #1 AUX #2 #3 AUX #4 #5 AUX #6
AGC
#1
AUX
#2
#3
AUX
#4
#5
AUX
#6
Table 2.23: Auxiliary Relays Interface
Item
Connector
Designation
ALM
Specification
12-Way Screw-terminal Connector
Å Summary Alarm output
Å
Sample of the Receivers AGC. Can be used as an input to an antenna pointing system.
(Does not apply to M2/PDU/942 or M2/PTRE/942[A][C] models)
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å These outputs can be associated with a specific alarm by using the Alarm Menu (#5) pages. This is described in Chapter 4, Alarms.
Å
Figure 2.10: Aux Relay Interface with Cable Connector Removed
2.7.5 Option Module Connectors
Option Modules are described in Chapter 5, Options.
Page 2-24 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Chapter 3
3.
Operating the Equipment Locally
Contents
3.1 Powering the Equipment........................................... 3-3
3.1.1 Switching On................................................. 3-3
3.1.2 Front Panel Over-air Download (Director) .... 3-3
3.1.3 Front Panel Software Manual Switch............ 3-3
3.1.4 Power-up Operating Modes.......................... 3-4
3.1.5 Front Panel Controls and Pushbuttons......... 3-5
3.2 Using the Local Controls........................................... 3-5
3.2.1 LCD Menu Descriptions................................ 3-5
3.2.2 Selecting a Menu Option .............................. 3-5
3.2.3 Entering a Menu Value ................................. 3-5
3.3 Setting up the Input (Menu #4).................................. 3-6
3.3.1 Satellite Receiver.......................................... 3-6
3.3.2 Terrestrial Receiver ...................................... 3-7
3.3.3 Digital ENG Receiver (to version 2.5.4)........ 3-7
3.3.4 Digital ENG Receiver (from version 2.8.3).... 3-8
Set-up ........................................................... 3-8
Auto Mode .................................................... 3-8
3.3.5 Decoder ........................................................ 3-9
3.4 Service Configuration (Menu #3) .............................. 3-9
3.4.1 Selecting a Service....................................... 3-9
Setting Up a Service..................................... 3-9
Setting Up the Power-up Service.................. 3-9
3.4.2 Selecting the Preferred Component
Language.................................................... 3-10
3.4.3 Selecting the Audio Component ................. 3-11
Introduction................................................. 3-11
Audio Selection - Manual............................ 3-11
Audio Selection - Automatic........................ 3-12
3.4.4 Selecting Data Component......................... 3-12
3.4.5 Setting up the Conditional
Access/Scrambling ..................................... 3-12
Introduction .................................................3-12
Remote Authorisation System (RAS)..........3-13
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System
(BISS)..........................................................3-13
VideoGuard.................................................3-13
VideoGuard, RAS and BISS........................3-13
Changing the VideoGuard Customer ID
(Menu #10, Page 4) ....................................3-13
3.4.6 Setting up the Transport Stream Output
(TSO) ..........................................................3-14
Set-up Procedure........................................3-14
Packet Lengths ...........................................3-14
ASI Output Mode.........................................3-15
3.5 Personalising the Alteia ...........................................3-15
3.5.1 Assigning Status Items (Menu #1) ..............3-15
Using the Status Menu Pages.....................3-15
Assigning a Status Item ..............................3-15
3.5.2 Setting up Pre-set Services (Menu #2) .......3-16
Using Pre-set Services................................3-16
Setting up a Pre-set Service .......................3-16
Setting up the Power-up Default Pre-set
Service ........................................................3-17
Clearing a Pre-set Service ..........................3-18
3.5.3 Frame Synchronisation ...............................3-18
Frame Sync Option .....................................3-18
Reference Signal.........................................3-18
Enabling Frame Sync..................................3-18
List of Figures
Figure 3.1: Power-up Operating Mode .......................................... 3-4
Figure 3.2: Automatic Selection of Languages............................ 3-11
Figure 3.3: Using the Preset Menu............................................. 3-16
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-1
Operating the Equipment Locally
Figure 3.4: Setting Up the Power-up Default................................3-17
Figure 3.5: Clear a Pre-set Service ..............................................3-18
List of Tables
Table 3.1: Selecting a Menu Option ...............................................3-5
Table 3.2: Entering a Menu Value..................................................3-6
Table 3.3: Tuning the Satellite Receiver ........................................3-6
Table 3.4: Tuning the Terrestrial Receiver.....................................3-7
Table 3.5: Setting up the Digital ENG Receiver .............................3-7
Table 3.6: Setting up the Digital ENG Receiver .............................3-8
Table 3.7: Setting up the Decoder..................................................3-9
Table 3.8: Selecting a Service........................................................3-9
Table 3.9: Selecting a Power-up Service ...................................... 3-9
Table 3.10: Selecting the Preferred Component Language ........ 3-10
Table 3.11: Manually Selecting the Audio Component ............... 3-12
Table 3.12: Selecting Data .......................................................... 3-12
Table 3.13: Setting up the Transport Stream Output (TSO)........ 3-14
Table 3.14: ASI Output Modes .................................................... 3-15
Table 3.15: Setting up the Status Pages..................................... 3-15
Table 3.16: Setting up a Pre-set Service..................................... 3-16
Table 3.17: Setting up the Default Pre-set Service ..................... 3-17
Table 3.18: Clearing a Pre-set Service........................................ 3-18
Page 3-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.1 Powering the Equipment
3.1.1 Switching On
CAUTION...
This equipment should not be operated unless the cooling fan is working and there is a free-air flow around the unit.
Connect the signal inputs and ac power supply to the Alteia and switch on.
After a short period of initialisation and the Alteia gaining lock, the unit powers up in Normal mode. This is the usual operating condition and is indicated by the (Signal) Lock LED being ON and the Remote Control LED being OFF.
The Lock LED will be GREEN if a signal is present and RED if there is no signal.
3.1.2 Front Panel Over-air Download (Director)
The Front Panel software can be updated following an Over-air software download. Under instruction from an Over-air Restart command, the current (active) Front Panel software code is checked against the corresponding code in the main receiver software. If the two are different, the Front Panel code embedded in the downloaded software is loaded to become the current (active) version. The previous version is retained in flash memory as inactive.
The LED in the LEFT button flashes to indicate that download is in progress. The process may take ten minutes to complete.
CAUTION…
Do not interrupt the update while it is in progress. To do so may render the update ineffective.
3.1.3 Front Panel Software Manual Switch
During start-up, the unit executes the Front Panel software residing in the active flash chip.
The unit can be forced to make the inactive (previous) Front Panel software the current software. Pressing the RIGHT button on the Front
Panel, as the receiver is powered-up, forces the Alteia to boot using the alternative software. The LED on the RIGHT button flashes during this process.
Check the software version to ensure the previously inactive software is now active.
The process is permanent; the previously inactive software becomes active and vice-versa.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-3
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.1.4 Power-up Operating Modes
If the EDIT button is pressed (and held until the name ALTEIA appears in the display) as power is applied, the Alteia enters the Front Panel test mode (see Chapter 6, Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding).
The Welcome page is displayed and The LEFT button LED is lit during the power up sequence
The Front Panel software can be updated following a software download.
The LEFT button
LED flashes during the re-boot process
Power-up
Is the
EDIT button held in?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the
RIGHT button held in?
Secondary
Flash code is loaded
Yes
Front Panel code updated if different to the installed version
No
Has new Front Panel software been received?
No
Front Panel
Test Mode*
(see Chapter 6)
*Test Mode available on version 2.2 onward
TANDBERG Director,
Over Air only:
This action allows the inactive code held in FLASH to be used.
Note that when used, this then becomes the active code.
The default Service is set in the Preset Menu
(Menu #2 page 7)
If no default has been entered, the service will then require manual setting
Alteia Initialisation
Acquire Default Service
Show STATUS menu (#1)
Local
What was
Control Mode at
Power Off?
Remote
LOCAL
CONTROL
Over-Air
(NCP)
REMOTE
CONTROL
Page 3-4
LOCAL
LOCKOUT
NCP Command
Enter PIN
TANDBERG
DIRECTOR:
OVER-AIR
CONTROL
Only available if
VideoGuard is installed and a valid
Smart card inserted
Figure 3.1: Power-up Operating Mode
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.1.5 Front Panel Controls and Pushbuttons
Front Panel items are described in Chapter 1, Section 1.8, Guided Tour.
If any Front Panel controls or buttons are not used for about three minutes, the display then reverts to Menu #1, page 1; any unsaved edits are lost.
3.2 Using the Local Controls
3.2.1 LCD Menu Descriptions
Detailed LCD menu descriptions are given in Annex C, Menus. This Chapter concentrates on describing the use of the menus for local operation.
3.2.2 Selecting a Menu Option
Some items shown in line 3 of the front panel LCD display have a set number of options. An example of this is the VIDEO OUTPUT SOURCE
(Menu #6, page 9) which has a number of preset Video Test Patterns associated with it.
Use the following steps as a general guide to selecting an option.
Table 3.1: Selecting a Menu Option
Step Action
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the menu and display the required selection.
Press the EDIT button on the front panel.
Use the SELECT control to step through the options.
Press the SAVE button to store the option or press EDIT to cancel the selection and return to the source menu.
Result
Normally there is only one selectable item. If there is more than one, use the RIGHT and LEFT buttons as described in Table 3.2.
The button LED will come on to show the Alteia is in EDIT mode.
This action scrolls through the options in a continuous loop.
3.2.3 Entering a Menu Value
Some items shown in line 3 of the front panel LCD display have a user-entered value. An example of this is the KU BAND FREQUENCY
(Satellite Receiver Menu #4, selection 4) in which the RF input frequency has to be entered. Use the following steps as a general guide to entering a value.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-5
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 3.2: Entering a Menu Value
Step Action
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Result
Select the menu and display the required selection.
Press the EDIT button on the front panel.
The button LED will come on to show the Alteia is in EDIT mode.
Use the RIGHT or LEFT button to move the cursor to the required digit.
Each button has an in-built LED that turns on if the button function is appropriate to the displayed information.
Change the value by using the SELECT control
Press the SAVE button to store the option.
3.3 Setting up the Input (Menu #4)
3.3.1 Satellite Receiver
Table 3.3 applies to models M2/PSR/9xx[A][B][C][D] and
M2/P8R/942[A][B][C][D]. It steps through the setting up of the Satellite
Receiver using menu #4. The transmission parameters must be known before starting.
Table 3.3: Tuning the Satellite Receiver
Step Action
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Go to Menu #4, page 3 and select the RF
Input
1
.
Go to Menu #4, page 6, select the
Polarisation and the Modulation Mode.
Press SAVE.
Go to Menu #4, page 7, select the LNB
Type and enter the LNB Local Oscillator
Frequency. Press SAVE.
If the LNB type is DUAL, go to page 8 and enter the LO FREQ 2 TYPE and switchover frequency (SW OVR FREQ).
Press SAVE.
Go to Menu #4, page 4 and enter the
Satellite Channel Frequency. Press
SAVE.
Go to Menu #4, page 5, select the FEC
Rate and enter the Symbol Rate. Press
SAVE.
The Tuner should now be locked to the incoming transport stream
2
.
Result
The receiver takes its signal from the input specified. Ensure that the input you choose is connected to the required source.
If the LNB is set to NONE, the LO frequency appears as a set of dashes. If NORMAL, the LO frequency is the current value. If set to
DUAL, the LO frequency displayed is the lowest.
A DUAL LNB has two LO frequencies, switching between them is by
22 kHz tone.
This sets up the RF stage in the receiver.
This sets up the overhead rates.
At this stage, the TUNER LOCK LED should light and the BER meter operate to show that the Receiver has picked up the signal.
1
RF input 1 is recommended for use as the main input.
2
If the transport stream is MPEG-2 –only, menus #2 and #3 page 1 show the service ID and not the service name.
Page 3-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.3.2 Terrestrial Receiver
Table 3.4 applies to models M2/PTR/942 and M2/PTR/948[A].
Table 3.4: Tuning the Terrestrial Receiver
2.
3.
4.
Step
1.
5.
Action
Go to Menu #4, page 8 and ensure the SIGNAL
DEGRADATION mode is switched OFF.
Result
This is a test mode that degrades the picture by a known amount. The status of the SIGNAL DEGRADATION mode is shown in line 1 of page 1 (DEG
ON | DEG OFF).
Go to Menu #4, page 12 and choose the appropriate INPUT.
Go to Menu #4, page 2 and choose the UHF
CHANNEL and required OFFSET.
Go to Menu #4, page 3 and set the GUARD
INTERVAL and OFDM CARRIER MODE to suit the system hardware.
If hierarchy is present (check on page 11), select the priority multiplex required.
This starts the tuning process. The guard interval will automatically set itself
(this can be checked on page 3).
This automatically sets the channel spacing (can be checked on page 6).
The final SAVE action will LOCK the receiver to the chosen incoming stream.
CAUTION…
(Does not apply to Version 2.3 and later.)
When using the combination 64QAM, 3/4 FEC, 1/32 Guard Interval and 204 packet length (29.454545 Mbit/s), the demodulator may not always lock up correctly following switch on or after a brief loss of signal. This will be apparent from a higher than expected BER or lack of video. Normal lock up is achieved by disconnecting and reconnecting the input.
2.
3.
4.
3.3.3 Digital ENG Receiver (to version 2.5.4)
Table 3.5 applies to model M2/PTRE/942 and 948C (to version 2.5.4). The
M2/PTRE/948C also allows a 70 MHz IF – Normal or 70 MHz IF –
Inverted input to be selected through Menu #4.
Table 3.5: Setting up the Digital ENG Receiver
Step
1.
Action
Go to Menu #4, page 8 and ensure the SIGNAL
DEGRADATION mode is switched OFF.
Go to Menu #4, page 12 and choose the
BASEBAND.
Go to Menu #4, page 3 and set the GUARD
INTERVAL to suit the system hardware.
If hierarchy is present (check on page 11), select the priority multiplex required.
Result
This is a test mode that degrades the picture by a known amount. The status of the SIGNAL DEGRADATION mode is shown in line 1 of page 1 (DEG
ON | DEG OFF).
This automatically sets the OFDM CARRIER MODE (can be checked on page 4).
The final SAVE action will LOCK the receiver to the chosen incoming stream.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-7
6.
7.
4.
5.
8.
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.3.4 Digital ENG Receiver (from version 2.8.3)
Set-up
Table 3.6 applies to model M2/PTRE/948C and 948CVL (from version
2.8.3). The M2/PTRE/948C and M2/PTRE/948CVL also allow a 70 MHz IF
– Normal or 70 MHz IF – Inverted input to be selected through Menu
#4.
Table 3.6: Setting up the Digital ENG Receiver
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
Go to Menu #4, page 8 and ensure the SIGNAL
DEGRADATION mode is switched OFF.
Go to Menu #4, page 12 and choose the appropriate INPUT.
Go to Menu #4, page 14 and choose the appropriate UHF FREQ. (Only if UHF has been
selected in Step 2.)
Go to Menu #4, page 6, select the Polarisation and the Modulation Mode. Press SAVE.
If hierarchy is present (check on page 11), select the priority multiplex required.
Go to Menu #4, page 3 and set the GUARD
INTERVAL to suit the system hardware.
Go to Menu #4, page 2 and set the SPECTRUM
INVERSION to either INVERTED or NORMAL.
Go to Menu #4, page 4 and set the OFDM
CARRIER MODE to suit the system hardware.
Result
This is a test mode that degrades the picture by a known amount. The status of the SIGNAL DEGRADATION mode is shown in line 1 of page 1 (DEG
ON | DEG OFF).
Select Channel Coding Type.
The final SAVE action will LOCK the receiver to the chosen incoming stream.
This automatically sets the OFDM CARRIER MODE (can be checked on page 4).
Select according to the number of carriers in use.
Auto Mode
Steps 6, 7 and 8 can be automated by using AUTO-MODE. AUTO-MODE provides for a simple one-shot setting, where all the channel parameters are not known. Setting AUTO-MODE to ON in Menu #4, Page 15 will cause the unit to hunt for the correct Guard Interval, Spectral Inversion and Carrier Mode (FFT). This process can take some time to obtain lock, but allows simplified set-up.
Once lock has been achieved the relevant pages will display the actual parameters found and AUTO-MODE will revert to OFF.
NOTE…
This is a single shot / one time set-up facility. It does not automatically regain lock on a channel parameter change. If a parameter change is made, AUTO-MODE will have to be reset to ON to obtain a lock, or settings will have to be changed manually.
Page 3-8 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
3.3.5 Decoder
Table 3.7 applies to models M2/PDU/942[B][C][D]
Table 3.7: Setting up the Decoder
Operating the Equipment Locally
Step
1.
2.
Action
Go to Menu #4, page 2 and select the required input.
Press the SAVE button to store the option.
Result
This sets the input for the Alteia input. If Auto is chosen, ensure that the signal is only routed to one connector at a time.
3.4 Service Configuration (Menu #3)
3.4.1 Selecting a Service
Setting Up a Service
Each transport stream may contain many Services. Menu #3 allows a
Service to be chosen as current and the profile of its components to be specified.
Table 3.8: Selecting a Service
Step
1.
2.
Action
Go to Menu #3, page 1 and select the required Service.
The EDIT mode cannot be entered unless there are available Services.
Press SAVE.
Result
This page shows the total number of Services available in the incoming transport stream. Use EDIT and SELECT to select the required Service.
This stores the Service as the Current Service.
Setting Up the Power-up Service
Menu #2 allows a Service to be chosen as the Power-up default.
Table 3.9: Selecting a Power-up Service
Step
1.
2.
Action
Go to Menu #2, page 3 and select the required Service (or last valid service).
Press SAVE.
Result
This sets the service to which the Alteia configures on power-up.
This stores the service as the power-up service.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-9
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.4.2 Selecting the Preferred Component Language
Pages 2 to 4 of Menu #3 allow the default languages for the audio channels and subtitles to be specified. The Alteia uses the default languages, if it can’t find these, then the first language specified in the
PMT is used. Menu #3 is used to override the choice.
Table 3.10: Selecting the Preferred Component Language
Step Action
1.
2.
Go to Menu #3, page 2, 3 or 4 as required.
Select the required language/s for each of the streams.
3. Press SAVE to store the choice.
Result
This displays the currently decoded languages.
Use EDIT and SELECT to select the required language.
For the audio modules, if the incoming audio is a Dolby Digital stream and Dolby Digital is not enabled, the language will not appear on the list.
The language profile is now set.
Page 3-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.4.3 Selecting the Audio Component
Introduction
There are two methods of selecting the audio components to be decoded by the Alteia. These are:
·
Automatic selection using defaults
·
Manual or remote selection for each individual service
The Alteia has two independent audio decoders. Each decoder can output a stereo pair or two mono-audio channels. Each decoder uses the language descriptor within the Service Information (SI) to select the required audio component. Therefore, all audio components must have a different language descriptor name. If the language for a number of components is the same, it is possible to manually select the required one. However, automatic selection will only choose the first instance of that name.
Audio Languages:
ENGLISH
DUTCH
FRENCH
GERMAN
SWEDISH
GREEK
TANDBERG
Up-converter and HPA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
ALTEIA
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
ALTEIA
Default Languages
Audio 1: ENGLISH
Audio 2: FRENCH
Default Languages
Audio 1: DUTCH
Audio 2: FRENCH
Default Languages
Audio 1: ENGLISH
Audio 2: DUTCH
Default Languages
Audio 1: GERMAN
Audio 2: SWEDISH
Default Languages
Audio 1: GREEK
Audio 2: ENGLISH
Default Languages
Audio 1: GERMAN
Audio 2: FRENCH
Figure 3.2: Automatic Selection of Languages
Audio Selection - Manual
It is possible to select any audio component from the active service by using the front panel controls or via the remote control interface.
Table 3.11 describes the procedure for selecting a component using a
Satellite Receiver. Other units act in a similar manner.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-11
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 3.11: Manually Selecting the Audio Component
Step Action
1.
2.
3.
Tune the Receiver to an incoming transport stream and select a service using page 1 of menu #3.
Go to the Service menu (#3). Pages 2 and 3 allow the audio components for Audio 1 and 2 to be selected. Press the EDIT button and rotate the SELECT control to scroll through the available streams.
Press SAVE to store the choice.
It can also be stored as a preset using Menu # 2.
Result
This selects the service from which to select the audio component.
This results in an audio stream being selected for each of Audio 1 and Audio 2.
The selected audio is now part of the active service.
Audio Selection - Automatic
To automatically select an audio language, the Alteia must have the default languages (for Audio1 and Audio2) defined. These are set in Menus
#8 and #9 page 3. Whenever a new service is selected, the Alteia automatically searches for that language. This feature enables a number of
Alteias to select different languages from the same transport stream. This feature is illustrated in Figure 3.2. See Annex G, Quick Reference Guide for setting the Audio defaults.
3.4.4 Selecting Data Component
Page 5 of Menu #3 allows the data streams to be decoded if there is more than one stream. If no choice has been made, the first data stream to appear in the Program Map Table (PMT) is decoded by default. Any other data streams are ignored unless selected through Menu #3.
Table 3.12: Selecting Data
Step
1.
2.
Action
Go to Menu #3 page 5.
If there are no streams, then NONE is displayed. If a number of streams are available, they are numbered and one can be selected. The Teletext module can be disabled.
Press SAVE to store the choice.
Result
This displays the current status of the Data streams.
Use EDIT and SELECT to select the required stream.
The Async and Sync data outputs are now set.
3.
3.4.5 Setting up the Conditional Access/Scrambling
Introduction
Menu #10 allows the status and configuration of the Conditional Access
(CA) module to be checked.
The structure and content of this group depends on the CA system. The available CA options are as follows:
·
No conditional access
·
VideoGuard
·
Remote Authorisation System (RAS)
·
VideoGuard, RAS and BISS
The Transport Stream command may require altering to accommodate the installed CA software.
Page 3-12 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Operating the Equipment Locally
Remote Authorisation System (RAS)
RAS has two levels of operation. These are designated as RAS1 and RAS2.
RAS1 has a fixed control word to encrypt the data in the transport stream.
Some control words are reserved for use in the TANDBERG Television
DSNG Encoder.
RAS2 is used for fixed head-end systems. Its main functionality is:
·
Over-air addressing of receivers for authorisation/de-authorisation to decrypt the transmission
·
Group operation for authorisation/de-authorisation
·
Periodic control word changes during transmission
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)
This product is compliant to transitional BISS as specified by the EBU
Technical specification; Tech 3290 March 2000. Please refer to TANDBERG
Television Customer Services regarding the use of BISS equipment.
VideoGuard
Insert a valid Director system card to enable the decryption.
VideoGuard, RAS and BISS
The process for setting this up is as for the RAS CA.
Changing the VideoGuard Customer ID (Menu #10, Page 4)
The unit must be re-powered with the appropriate smart card installed after the Customer ID has been changed.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-13
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.4.6 Setting up the Transport Stream Output (TSO)
Set-up Procedure
Page 3 of Menu #11 is used to allow the transport stream for the current service to bypass the CA module on its way to the TSO module.
Table 3.13: Setting up the Transport Stream Output (TSO)
Step Action
1. In Menu # 11 (Data), go to page 3.
2.
3.
If the Alteia is appropriately authorised, and the TSO selection is DECRYPTED, then the transport stream passes through the CA module as follows:
·
VideoGuard: Semi-decrypted
·
BISS: Part/ Semi-decrypted
·
RAS2: Fully decrypted
·
RAS1: Fully decrypted
If the transport stream output is to remain encrypted, choose the ENCRYPTED option.
For VideoGuard, only components of the currently selected service, which is being successfully decoded and decrypted by the IRD, will be presented to the
TSO in their decrypted form.
A maximum of 6 components, all from the same locally selected service will be passed to the TSO in their decrypted form. If a service contains more than 6 components, the remainder will stay encrypted. (see table C.22, [Menu 10, pages 11 and 12] for instructions on selecting which components remain encrypted).
The Semi-decrypted output contains the original, unmodified SI, PSI and CA information. This includes CA descriptors of the currently selected service. This should be considered when feeding downstream re-mux type products.
This restriction does not applied to RAS decryption where the entire transport stream can be decrypted.
Press SAVE to store the choice.
Result
This displays the current status of the incoming Transport Stream.
The Transport Stream Output will be formatted according to the choice made.
The Transport Stream Output
(TSO) is now set.
Packet Lengths
The output is an MPEG-2 bit-stream from the received services.
The output packet length depends on the input.
·
For Receivers, if the incoming stream is 204-bytes (because of
Reed-Solomon coding), the output bit-stream also consists of 204-byte packets (containing 16 bytes of redundant Reed-Solomon error correction).
·
For Decoders, the output packet length is the same as that at the input.
Page 3-14 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Operating the Equipment Locally
ASI Output Mode
The ASI transmission of data within Alteia conforms to the DVB specification, "INTERFACES FOR CATV / SMATV HEADENDS AND SIMILAR
PROFESSIONAL EQUIPMENT" DVB DOCUMENT A010 rev. 1 May 1997
Annex B.
·
All models except M2/PDU/P42C Decoder
The ASI output is byte-mode only.
·
M2/PDU/P42C Decoder
If the ASI output option card is used (see Chapter 5, Options) the output mode is dependent on the input mode. If the input mode is SPI, the ASI output is byte-mode. If the input is ASI, the ASI output is single packet burst mode.
Table 3.14: ASI Output Modes
Input Mode ASI Output Mode
ASI
SPI
DVB Document A010 rev. 1 Description
Single packet burst mode Transmission Format with Data Packets
Byte-mode Transmission Format with Data Bursts
3.5 Personalising the Alteia
3.5.1 Assigning Status Items (Menu #1)
Using the Status Menu Pages
This group of pages is the primary Menu for the Alteia. The factory default for page 1 is for it to display the current service name. There are four other pages (initially blank) which allow items associated with the service to be displayed in an order determined by the operator.
Assigning a Status Item
Menu #1 allows selected pages from any other menu to be displayed (in a non-editable form) in an order determined by the operator. Table 3.15 shows the process, using page 2 as an example. The process is identical for the other pages.
Table 3.15: Setting up the Status Pages
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
Go to Menu #1, page 2.
Rotate the SELECT control until the required parameter is displayed on the LCD display.
Press SAVE to store the choice.
Result
This displays a blank page.
This action selects the required non-editable item for storing.
The selected item is now displayed on Menu #1, page 2 for the current service.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-15
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.5.2 Setting up Preset Services (Menu #2)
Using Preset Services
This group allows up to 20 (00 to 19) services to be stored as presets.
Selecting a Service from the preset list in Menu #2 page 1 automatically reconfigures the Alteia to receive that Service with its associated parameters set as stored.
NOTE…
A preset can only be stored if the service is currently being decoded.
Use Menu #2 Page 1 to SELECT a preset.
Use Menu #2 Page 2 to STORE a preset.
Use Menu #2 Page 3 to DEFAULT a preset.
Use Menu #2 Page 4 to CLEAR a preset.
nn is the storage slot
MENU
EDIT SAVE
service name is the current (or stored) service.
2/4 â
SELECT
Press EDIT in conjunction with rotating the SELECT control to access a storage slot.
#2 PRESET
STORE [service name] IN nn [EMPTY]
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
Press SAVE to confirm the required action.
Press EDIT in conjunction with rotating the
SELECT control to access a storage slot.
LEFT RIGHT
Figure 3.3: Using the Preset Menu
Setting up a Pre-set Service
Follow the steps in Table 3.16 to store the current Service as a preset.
Table 3.16: Setting up a Preset Service
Step Action
1.
2.
Use the menus to set-up the unit so that the required
Service is current. (See Sections 3.3 and 3.4)
Display page 2 of the preset menu (#2).
(The Service Name in this display is truncated to 11 characters)
3.
4.
5.
Select a location to store the preset.
The EDIT mode cannot be entered unless a valid
Service being decoded.
Press SAVE.
CONFIRM the selection.
Result
This selects the Service and associated parameters for the preset process.
This displays the menu which allows the Current Service to be stored at a chosen location (00 - 19). If there is no
Current Service, the menu display reads NOTHING TO
STORE.
Use EDIT and SELECT to step through the stored items.
This allows a specific location to be chosen. Any vacant locations are marked by the legend [EMPTY].
Confirmation is required before the selection is stored.
This stores the current Service and its associated parameters as a preset in the selected location. This adds the Service to the list displayed on page 1.
Page 3-16 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Setting up the Power-up Default Preset Service
Follow the steps in Table 3.17 to select the preset Service that will be presented on power-up.
service name is the stored service preset.
nn is the storage slot.
MENU
#2 PRESET
DEFAULT nn [service name]
3/4 â
Operating the Equipment Locally
SELECT
Press EDIT in conjunction with rotating the SELECT control to access a storage slot.
EDIT SAVE
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
Press SAVE to confirm the Default selection.
LEFT RIGHT
Press EDIT in conjunction with rotating the
SELECT control to access a storage slot.
Figure 3.4: Setting Up the Power-up Default
The LAST VALID SERVICE can be chosen instead to allow the Alteia to power up to the Service that was in use at power-down.
Table 3.17: Setting up the Default Preset Service
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action Result
Display page 3 of the Preset menu (#2).
This is the menu that allows the default preset Service to be selected.
Select the required preset Service as the default on power-up.
Use EDIT and SELECT to step through the stored presets.
Alternatively, choose LAST VALID SERVICE to automatically reselect the Service in use at power-down.
Press SAVE.
This stores the selected preset Service and its associated parameters as the default Service to be presented on power-up.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 3-17
Operating the Equipment Locally
Clearing a Preset Service
To clear a preset Service from the list, follow the steps in Table 3.18.
nn is the storage slot
MENU
#2 PRESET
CLEAR nn [service name]
service name is the stored service preset.
4/4 â
SELECT
Press EDIT in conjunction with rotating the SELECT control to access a storage slot.
EDIT SAVE
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
Press SAVE to Clear the storage slot.
Press EDIT in conjunction with rotating the
SELECT control to access a storage slot.
Figure 3.5: Clear a Preset Service
LEFT RIGHT
Table 3.18: Clearing a Preset Service
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
Action
Display page 4 of the preset menu (#2).
Select the required preset Service.
Press SAVE.
CONFIRM the selection.
Result
This menu allows the currently selected preset to be cleared from the store.
Use EDIT and SELECT to step through the stored presets.
Confirmation is required before the selection is cleared.
This clears the Service from the store and inserts the legend
[EMPTY] against the store number.
3.5.3 Frame Synchronisation
Frame Sync Option
For Frame Synchronisation to work, the Frame Sync option
(M2/PRO/SYNC) must have been purchased and installed in the unit. This being the case, the Alteia plus software will detect it during initialisation and show the corresponding menu screen (menu #6 (Video) page 13).
Reference Signal
The line standard of the Frame Sync reference signal must match the line standard of the video signal being decoded. For a video signal line standard of 625/50, the reference signal line standard must be 625/50 and likewise, for a video signal line standard of 525/60, the reference signal line standard must be 525/60.
Enabling Frame Sync
To enable Frame Synchronisation, go to menu #6 (Video), page13 (Frame
Sync). Press EDIT, rotate the SELECT knob until ENABLED is seen on the bottom line of the display and then press SAVE.
With Frame Sync enabled, the display will show the lock status. If the locking signal applied to the Frame Sync input is good, the display will show LOCKED otherwise the display will show NOT LOCKED.
Page 3-18 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Chapter 4
4.
Alarms
Contents
4.1 Front Panel Alarms and Indications .......................... 4-3
4.1.1 Introduction................................................... 4-3
4.1.2 Location of the Alarm and Indication
LEDs............................................................. 4-3
4.1.3 Authorised LED Indications and Alarms
(CA) .............................................................. 4-4
4.1.4 Summary Alarm............................................ 4-4
4.2 Operational Alarm Conditions ................................... 4-5
4.2.1 Asynchronous Data Alarm............................ 4-5
4.2.2 Closed Captions (Software Version 2.2
and Earlier) ................................................... 4-5
4.3 Summary Alarm Masking and Relay Setting............. 4-6
List of Figures
Figure 4.1: Front Panel Alarm Indications ..................................... 4-3
Figure 4.2: Satellite Receiver Alarm Sources................................ 4-6
List of Tables
Table 4.1: Authorised LED............................................................. 4-4
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 4-1
Alarms
BLANK
Page 4-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Alarms
4.1 Front Panel Alarms and Indications
4.1.1 Introduction
There are a number of Front Panel LEDs, which indicate the status of the
Alteia. These can be used indicate abnormal running of the unit.
4.1.2 Location of the Alarm and Indication LEDs
MENU SELECT
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
#1 STATUS
[message string]
[message string/editable field]
<n/04>
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY LEFT RIGHT
STATUS EDIT SAVE
(TUNER) LOCK Indication
LED Status
Not lit
Green
Description
The Alteia is not locked either because the incoming transport stream is not present or it is not valid.
A valid transport stream has been detected and the unit has locked to it.
AUTHORIZED Indication
LED Status
Not lit
Blinking
(Green)
Green
Red
Description
Conditional Access is not being applied to the received service.
RAS1 or BISS Conditional Access system in operation.
All the conditions required to decode an incoming encrypted service have been met.
All or some of the conditions required to decode an incoming encrypted service have not been met.
REMOTE CTRL Indication
LED Status
Not lit
Red
Description
The unit is in LOCAL CONTROL mode.
The unit is in REMOTE CONTROL / OVER-AIR mode.
Summary ALARM Indication
LED Status
Green
Red
Description
No unmasked alarms reported. (Alarms are masked using the Alarm Menu pages, see Annex C, Menus.)
An unmasked alarm is active. Use the Alarm Menu #5 pages to investigate the cause.
Figure 4.1: Front Panel Alarm Indications
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 4-3
Alarms
4.1.3 Authorised LED Indications and Alarms (CA)
Table 4.1: Authorised LED
Model
All models
All models
Models with RAS enabled
Models with BISS enabled
Models with
VideoGuard enabled
Legend Displayed on
Menu #10, Page 1
AUTHORIZED
LED Status
NO SERVICE SELECTED OFF
CLEAR
RAS2 AUTHORISED
OFF
Green
RAS1
RAS2 UNAUTHORISED
BISS AUTHORISED
BISS UNAUTHORISED
VGUARD AUTHORIZED
Green (Blinking)
Red
Green (Blinking)
Red
Green
VGUARD
UNAUTHORIZED
Red
Description
A stream transmitted clear has been detected.
A stream scrambled with RAS2 has been detected and the unit is authorised to decrypt it.
A stream scrambled with RAS1 has been detected.
A stream scrambled with RAS has been detected and the unit is not authorised to decrypt it.
A stream scrambled with BISS Mode 1, 2 or 3 has been detected and the unit is authorised to decrypt it.
A stream scrambled with BISS Mode 1 has been detected but the unit is in BISS Disabled mode.
A stream scrambled with Videoguard conditional access has been detected and the unit is authorised to decrypt it.
A stream scrambled with Videoguard conditional access has been detected and the unit is not authorised to decrypt it.
4.1.4 Summary Alarm
The front panel summary ALARM LED provides a high-level indication of an alarm within the unit. The alarm list depends on the Alteia model. The alarm lights under the following conditions (if not masked – see Annex C,
Menus, Menu #5):
·
No valid input signal
·
Signal level too low
·
The input frequency is out of range
·
The received Service is not authorised
·
The Smart-Card is not readable
·
The LNB supply trips
·
The tuner/demodulator is not locked
Page 4-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Alarms
4.2 Operational Alarm Conditions
4.2.1 Asynchronous Data Alarm
If asynchronous data is not present in the selected service, an Async alarm will be raised. If asynchronous data is not used, mask the alarm (see
Section 4.3, Summary Alarm Masking and Relay Setting).
4.2.2 Closed Captions (Software Version 2.2 and Earlier)
WARNING…
IF CLOSED CAPTION IS DISABLED, IT CAN CAUSE A SINGLE GREEN LINE IN THE FIRST LINE
OF THE VBI.
TANDBERG Television Ltd recommend that Closed Captions should be left at the Factory Default (ENABLED). See Menu #7.
If the Closed Captions option is ENABLED and the incoming service does not contain them, a VBI alarm will be raised in Menu #5. Mask the alarm on the same page.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 4-5
Alarms
4.3 Summary Alarm Masking and Relay Setting
Figure 4.2 shows the alarm sources for a Satellite Receiver, however the principle is the same for Decoders and Terrestrial Receivers. Illustrated are the effects of the Relay and Mask options. Also shown are the sources that cannot be masked. Relays can be assigned in any chosen order and more than one Alarm can be assigned to a relay contact, creating an alarm group. The choices made in Figure 4.2 are for illustration purposes only.
ALM
(summary)
RELAY:
(Rear panel connector)
ALARM MENU (#5)
FUNCTION / MODULE
02 - INPUT: OK
FAIL
03 - VIDEO: OK
FAIL
04 - VBI:
05 - AUDIO 1:
06 - AUDIO 2:
07 - ASYNC:
08 - SYNC:
OK
FAIL
OK
FAIL
OK
FAIL
OK
FAIL
OK
FAIL
09 - CA: OK
FAIL
10 - TEMPERATURE: OK
FAIL
11 - FAN STATUS: OK
FAIL
RELAY
1
NONE
2
NONE
4
NONE
3
NONE
FUNCTION / MODULE
1 - ALARM STATUS
[page numbers of alarm items]
SATELLITE RECEIVER INPUT MENU (#4)
FUNCTION / MODULE
01 - BER n.nE-n
[Received BER level]
FUNCTION / MODULE
10 - LIMITS BER LEVEL
[Sets BER and LEVEL alarm threshold values]
&
&
FUNCTION / MODULE
02 - LEVEL
[Shows input level]
1
2
3 4 5 6
MASK
YES
NO
YES
FUNCTION / MODULE
11 - USER ALARM MASK
[store alarm mask profile]
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
Figure 4.2: Satellite Receiver Alarm Sources
OR
ALARM
(Front panel)
Page 4-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Chapter 5
5.
Options
Contents
5.1 ASI Output Module (M2/PRO/ASI)............................ 5-3
5.1.1 General Description...................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Connector Details ......................................... 5-3
DVB ASI Copper Connector ......................... 5-3
DVB ASI Optical Connector.......................... 5-4
5.2 Options (Purchasable) .............................................. 5-4
List of Tables
Table 5.1: DVB ASI Copper Output............................................... 5-3
Table 5.2: DVB ASI Optical Output ............................................... 5-4
Table 5.3: Options (Purchasable).................................................. 5-4
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 5-1
Options
BLANK
Page 5-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Options
5.1 ASI Output Module (M2/PRO/ASI)
5.1.1 General Description
Output formats are DVB asynchronous serial (copper), and asynchronous serial (optical). The synchronous parallel interface (TSO-SPI) is available on the rear panel as standard. The full multiplex of compressed services can be used for satellite signal re-distribution (via a Modulator) or for redistribution via telecom links (using a suitable interface).
5.1.2 Connector Details
DVB ASI Copper Connector
This provides a copper connector for the DVB Asynchronous
Serial Interface (ASI) with the following consideration:
·
All models except M2/PDU/942C Decoder.
The ASI output is byte-mode only.
·
M2/PDU/942C Decoder.
If the ASI output option card is used, the output mode depends on the input mode. If the input mode is SPI, the ASI output is byte-mode. If the input is ASI, the ASI output is single packet burst mode.
NOTE…
Terminate this connector in 75
W when not in use.
Table 5.1: DVB ASI Copper Output
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Cable specification
Connection
Specification
SELV
BNC, Female 75 W
TSO ASI
Capable of transmitting a maximum frequency of 850 MHz
Pin: Signal Shield: Ground/Chassis
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 5-3
Options
DVB ASI Optical Connector
WARNING…
LASER: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTE…
The Class 1 LASER warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
Provides an optical fibre connector for the DVB
Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI). This output is continuously active when fitted.
Table 5.2: DVB ASI Optical Output
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Fibre optic cable type
Maximum cable attenuation
Maximum output cable length
Maximum data rate
Transmission format
Specification
CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT as defined in EN 60825-1
SC type
TSO ASI (FIBER)
Multimode 62.5/125 mm
1.5 dB/km @ 1300 nm
£2.66 km
270 Mbit/s
See para 5.1.1
5.2
Page 5-4
Options (Purchasable)
There are a number of options that can be purchased separately. Some of these are model dependent. Table 5.3 lists the options.
Table 5.3: Options (Purchasable)
Description Option Type Marketing Code
ASI Output Module
BISS
Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio
Frame Synchroniser option
RAS I and II
Internal card M2/PRO/ASI
Software M2/PRO/BISS
Software
Software
Software
Linear Audio (SMPTE 302M-1998) Software
M2/PRO/DAC3
M2/PRO/SYNC
M2/PRO/RAS
Linear Audio (SMPTE 302M-2000)
VBI reinsertion
Software
Software
M2/PRO/LINA
M2/PRO/LINA
M2/PRO/AVBI
Availability (S/W version)
all versions
2.8 and later
2.2 and later
2.4 and later
2.1.1 and later
2.4 to 2.5.5
2.8 and later
2.4 and later
NOTES…
1. A software upgrade to v2.8 would require the installation of Linear Audio (SMPTE 302M-2000).
2. M2/PTRE/948CVL comprises M2/PTRE/948C plus M2/PRO/LINA.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Chapter 6
6.
Preventive Maintenance and
Fault-finding
Contents
6.1 Routine Checks......................................................... 6-3
6.1.1 Cooling Fan .................................................. 6-3
6.1.2 Cleaning........................................................ 6-3
6.2 Servicing ................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Conditions Requiring Servicing..................... 6-3
6.2.2 Replacement Parts ....................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Checks on Completion of Servicing.............. 6-4
6.3 Maintenance and Support Services .......................... 6-4
6.3.1 Introduction................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Warranty ....................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG
Television Service Support........................... 6-4
6.4 Fault-finding .............................................................. 6-4
6.4.1 General......................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Factory Default Settings ............................... 6-5
6.4.3 Preliminary Investigations............................. 6-5
6.4.4 Testing The Front Panel ............................... 6-5
Setting up the Test Mode.............................. 6-5
Testing the Front Panel LEDs....................... 6-5
Testing the BER Meter (Receivers Only)...... 6-5
Testing the LCD Display............................... 6-5
6.4.5 Asynchronous Data Alarm............................ 6-5
6.4.6 Closed Captions (Software Version 2.2
and Earlier) ................................................... 6-6
6.4.7 Remote Control............................................. 6-6
6.4.8 Frame Sync Not Working.............................. 6-6
6.4.9 Terrestrial Receiver M2/PTR/9xx.................. 6-7
High BER Reading........................................ 6-7
Signal Degradation Mode..............................6-7
6.5 Changing the Equipment Fuse ..................................6-8
6.6 Disposal.....................................................................6-9
6.6.1 Moulded Plugs...............................................6-9
6.6.2 Equipment .....................................................6-9
List of Tables
Table 6.1: Fuse Information........................................................... 6-8
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 6-1
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
Page 6-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.1 Routine Checks
6.1.1 Cooling Fan
There are no routine checks associated with this equipment other than to ensure that the unit is adequately cooled. This equipment must never be operated unless the cooling fan is working; this should be checked periodically.
CAUTION...
The fan contained within this unit is not fitted with an insect/dust filter. Pay particular attention to the environment in which it is going to be used.
6.1.2 Cleaning
Unplug the equipment from the supply before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning the exterior of the
Receiver.
6.2 Servicing
6.2.1 Conditions Requiring Servicing
WARNING…
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THIS PRODUCT AS OPENING OR REMOVING COVERS MAY
EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS. REFER ALL SERVICING TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG TELEVISION.
The following is a list of conditions that may indicate the need for servicing:
1. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.
2. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.
3. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
4. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation.
5. If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged.
6. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
7. If the equipment has been subject to a lightning strike or power surge.
6.2.2 Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure only parts specified by
TANDBERG Television Ltd (or having the same characteristics as the original part) have been used. Unauthorised substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 6-3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.2.3 Checks on Completion of Servicing
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in a safe operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be required.
6.3 Maintenance and Support Services
6.3.1 Introduction
TANDBERG Television is a leader in the design, integration and implementation of digital broadcasting products and systems. It has a large team dedicated to keeping our customers on air 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
With regional offices worldwide, and ultra-modern specialist service facilities in the US, UK, Hong Kong and Australia, TANDBERG Television covers the world. There is a customer service centre open round the clock, every day of the year, in your time zone.
TANDBERG’s years of design and support experience enable it to offer a range of service options that will meet your needs at a price that makes sense.
It’s called the TANDBERG Advantage.
6.3.2 Warranty
All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
6.3.3 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service
Support
For standalone equipment, then TANDBERG Television BASIC Advantage is the value for money choice for you.
BASIC provides you with year-by-year Service long after the warranty has expired.
VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution.
This provides a service specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational.
More information can be obtained from TANDBERG Television Customer
Services; contact information is given in the preliminary pages of this manual.
6.4 Fault-finding
6.4.1 General
The information contained in this chapter is intended to isolate the unit as the faulty equipment if a system failure occurs. If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, please contact Customer Services using the information given in the Preliminary Pages of this manual.
Page 6-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.4.2 Factory Default Settings
Alteias are dispatched with the factory defaults shown in Annex F. These can be restored at any time using System Menu (#13).
6.4.3 Preliminary Investigations
1. Ensure all leads and connectors are in place and serviceable.
2. Ensure the unit is powered. If not investigate the power source.
Check the fuse.
3. Ensure any red alarm LEDs on the front of the unit are not lit. If any are, investigate the Alarm status (see Chapter 4, Alarms).
4. Use the BER display to ensure that the Receiver is within its carrier capture range. If it is not, check the input to the Receiver.
6.4.4 Testing The Front Panel
Setting up the Test Mode
Press and hold the EDIT button, then power up the Alteia. When the name
ALTEIA is displayed, the unit is in Test Mode: release the EDIT button. The
LCD display will not proceed to the usual start-up routine.
Testing the Front Panel LEDs
Repeatedly press the EDIT button to continuously step through the LEDs in the following sequence:
ALARM
ALARM
REMOTE CTRL
REMOTE CTRL
AUTHORIZED
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
LOCK
RIGHT button
LEFT button
SAVE button
EDIT button
Red
Green
Red
Green
Red
Green
Red
Green
Green
Green
Red
Green
Testing the BER Meter (Receivers Only)
Rotate the SELECT control anti-clockwise one step. The BER meter needle should indicate 10
-4
.
Testing the LCD Display
Pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button once displays all segments. Press
SAVE to clear the display.
6.4.5 Asynchronous Data Alarm
If asynchronous data is not present in the selected service, an Async alarm will be raised. If asynchronous data is not used, mask the alarm (see
Chapter 4, Alarms).
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 6-5
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.4.6 Closed Captions (Software Version 2.2 and Earlier)
If Closed Caption is DISABLED, it can cause a single green line in the first line of the VBI. It is advisable that Closed Captions should be left at the
Factory Default (ENABLED). See Menu #7, page 5 (s/w ver 2.1) or page 6
(s/w ver 2.2 and 2.3).
If the Closed Caption option is ENABLED and the incoming service does not contain them, a VBI alarm will be raised in Menu #5. Mask the alarm on the same page.
6.4.7 Remote Control
The Alteia remote control input operates with both RS-232 and RS-485 serial data formats (Menu #13, page 4). In addition, a device address can be set (in Menu #13, page 3) for use in multi-drop RS-485 systems.
CAUTION…
Be sure to set the correct format and address via the front panel before attempting to use this input. The
Alteia will ignore any remote control commands if the input is not correctly set.
6.4.8 Frame Sync Not Working
Following the questions and steps below will help you solve the problem. If the problem is cured at any point, there is no need to complete the list:
1. Has the Frame Sync option (M2/PRO/SYNC) been purchased and installed in the unit? If you are unsure, look in menu #6 page13.
a) If the option is not installed, the display will show NOT PURCHASED
(Alteia plus, software v2.4 and later). Contact TANDBERG
Television Sales department for further information.
b) If the option is installed, the display will show either ENABLED or
DISABLED.
2. Is the Frame Sync option enabled? Look in menu #6 page13.
a) If it is DISABLED, refer to Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment
Locally. The section Frame Synchronisation, Enabling Frame Sync, takes you through the steps required to enable Frame Sync.
b) If it is ENABLED, the display shows LOCKED when the Alteia has locked to the reference signal applied to the Frame Sync input. If the display shows UNLOCKED the external locking signal is then suspect. Go through the following questions in order, if the problem is cured at any point, there is no need to complete the list: i. Is the Frame Sync cable connected?
ii. The input is high impedance; an external resister is required.
Is the Frame Sync signal terminated?
iii. Is there a good connection on the wire?
iv. Is the signal in good condition (good sync pulse etc.)?
v. If the locking signal is applied to other equipment, will that equipment lock satisfactorily to the signal?
vi. If other equipment will lock to the reference signal but the Alteia will not, contact Customer Services.
Page 6-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.4.9 Terrestrial Receiver M2/PTR/9xx
High BER Reading
This may be due to Signal Degradation being enabled in Menu #4 (Input),
Page 8. Disable it and note the difference.
Signal Degradation Mode
The Signal Degradation Mode is a test function designed to enable the extension of the Post-Viterbi Bit Error Rate (BER) measurement capability of the OFDM Receiver. Normally the measurement of BER is limited to a figure of 10
7
errors. Measurement of lower error rates is dependent upon increasing the measuring time. Thus it would require an unacceptably long measurement time to measure lower BERs using the current range of
Transport Stream bit-rates.
In practice the range of BER measurement capability means that the Quasi
Error Free (QEF) threshold (the level just above the OFDM failure level), equating to a BER of approximately 2 x 10
-4
, corresponds to a carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) of approximately 20 dBs. Above this C/N, BER measurements can usefully be made for about 4 dBs to a C/N of approximately 24 dBs. To measure BER at higher levels of C/N would take too long for normal system parameter monitoring purposes.
An apparent reduction in the transmitter output C/N is caused by non-linear operation of the transmitter, whereby inter-modulation products are generated which appear like an increase in the noise floor. This effect is known as Equivalent Noise Degradation (END). It is this type of performance degradation that the Signal Degradation mode is primarily aimed at measuring.
The Signal Degradation mode extends the range of measurement by approximately a further 5 dBs, such that BER can be measured up to a C/N of approximately 28 dBs. Normally it is anticipated that this would be used as a demodulator test function where it would not be in the broadcast signal path. In this mode it would be used to monitor the performance of the transmitter and left switched on. It would not normally be used in an off-air reception mode of operation because the performance of the system would be significantly degraded. It could be switched on occasionally to give some indication of field strength if the Receiver is not indicating any
Post-Viterbi BER.
It should be noted that the effect of the signal degradation mode varies with input signal level. As measured at different signal levels and comparing the degradation of the BER caused by (1) the signal degradation mode and (2) varying the C/N to achieve the same change in
BER as signal degradation mode, the equivalent effect of the signal degradation mode to changes in C/N, varies with level of the received signal. Therefore it may be necessary to adjust the input level to achieve the optimum measurement criteria.
In the Alteia, seven signal degradation modes are provided, whilst in the
‘0’ position the signal degradation mode is switched off. Mode 1 provides a setting about mid-range. Modes 2 to 7 bracket mode 1 and range from the minimum degradation of 2 to the maximum of 7. If mode 7 is selected near the MPEG failure threshold, the Alteia may experience difficulty re-locking after the loss of input signal. In this case mode 0 should be reselected to acquire the signal and once locked mode 7 can be reselected.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 6-7
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.5 Changing the Equipment Fuse
CAUTION...
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home or business, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
The power supply used in this equipment is a wide-ranging, ac power supply unit designed for use in ambient air temperature conditions of 0°C to +50°C for 100-120 Vac and 220-240 Vac, 50-60 Hz (see Annex B,
Technical Specification for details). There are no links or switches to be altered for operation from different ac supplies.
The Alteia is designed for user accessible fuse replacement.
In addition to the fuse in the supply cable plug (if appropriate) a fuse is held in the fuse carrier of the ac power inlet at the rear of the Alteia.
Table 6.1: Fuse Information
Item
Fuse
Fuse type
Fuse rating
Specification
Single pole, fitted in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit.
5 mm x 20 mm anti-surge (T) HBC, IEC127 (sheet v)
1.6 A, 250 Vac
To replace the ac power fuse perform the following:
WARNING…
BEFORE REPLACING THE REAR PANEL FUSE, DISCONNECT THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE
SUPPLY. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY EXPOSE HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES. UNPLUG THE
EQUIPMENT FROM THE LOCAL SUPPLY SOCKET.
1. Ensure that power is turned off and the power cable is disconnected from the ac power inlet.
2. Ease out the fuse carrier by placing a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in the notches at the sides of the carrier.
CAUTION...
When replacing the power input fuse, always ensure that a fuse of the correct type and rating is fitted.
Failure to do so results in inadequate protection. If the replacement fuse also blows, do not continue.
Disconnect the equipment and contact Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages) for advice.
3. Replace the fuse in the carrier.
4. Insert the fuse carrier back in the ac power inlet.
Page 6-8
AC Power Inlet
To access the fuse, ease out the notch with a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Fuse Carrier
Figure 6.1: Fuse Carrier
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.6 Disposal
6.6.1 Moulded Plugs
If the moulded plug fitted to the mains cable supplied with this equipment is not required, use another cable. If the supplied plug is to be changed cut it off and dispose of it safely.
WARNING...
IF THE MOULDED PLUG FITTED TO THE MAINS CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT IS
NOT REQUIRED, PLEASE CUT IT OFF AND DISPOSE OF IT SAFELY. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY
ENDANGER LIFE AS LIVE ENDS MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE REMOVED PLUG IS INSERTED INTO
A MAINS OUTLET.
6.6.2 Equipment
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Check with your local authority.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page 6-9
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
Page 6-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Annex A
A.
Glossary
The following list covers most of the abbreviations, acronyms and terms as used in
TANDBERG Television Limited Manuals. All terms may not be included in this manual.
mm
3:2 pulldown
4:2:0
4:2:2
422P@ML
5B6B
AC-3
ACC
ADPCM
ADT
AFC
AFS
AGC
AMOL I and II
ASI
ASIC
Async
ATM
ATSC
Micrometre (former name - micron): a unit of length equal to one millionth (10 -6 ) of a metre.
A technique used when converting film material (which operates at 24 pictures per second) to 525-line video
(operating at 30 pictures per second).
Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate.
Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate.
422 Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 50 Mbit/s over various mediums. Used for Contribution and Distribution applications.
5 Binary Bits Encoded to 6 Binary Bits: Block code.
Audio Coding algorithm number 3 (See Dolby Digital).
Authorisation Control Computer.
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An advanced PCM technique that reduces the bit-rate by coding the difference values between successive samples rather than the absolute value of each sample.
Audio, Data And Teletext.
Automatic Frequency Control.
Automation File Server.
Automatic Gain Control.
Automatic Measure of Line-ups I and II: Used by automated equipment to measure programme-viewing ratings.
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit: A customised chip designed to perform a specific function.
Asynchronous.
Asynchronous Transfer Mode: A connection orientated, cell based, data transport technology designed for
Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN). It provides a circuit-switched bandwidth-on-demand carrier system, with the flexibility of packet switching. It offers low end-to-end delays and (negotiable on call set-up) Quality of Service guarantees.
Asynchronous refers to the sporadic nature of the data being transmitted. Cells are transmitted only when data is to be sent; therefore the time interval between cells varies according to the availability of data.
Advanced Television Standards Committee: An organisation founded in 1983 to research and develop a digital
TV standard for the U.S.A. In late 1996, the FCC adopted the ATSC standard, the digital counterpart of the NTSC standard.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page A-1
Glossary
B3ZS
Backward Compatibility
BAT baud rate
BER
BISS
Bit-rate
Block; Pixel Block
Bouquet
B-Picture; B-Frame
BPSK
Buffer
BW
Byte-mode
CA
CAT
C-Band
CCIR
CCITT
Channel
Channel Coding
Chrominance
Closed Captioning
CODE
Codec
COFDM
Page A-2
Bipolar with Three Zero Substitution: A method of eliminating long zero strings in a transmission. It is used to ensure a sufficient number of transitions to maintain system synchronisation when the user data stream contains an insufficient number of 1s to do so. B3ZS is the North American equivalent of the European HDB3.
Refers to hardware or software that is compatible with earlier versions.
Bouquet Association Table: Part of the service information data. The BAT provides information about bouquets.
It gives the name of the bouquet and a list of associated services.
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises information symbols that may consist of a number of possible states. Equivalent to bit-rate when the symbols only have two states (1 and 0). Measured in Baud.
Bit Error Rate: A measure of transmission quality. The rate at which errors occur in the transmission of data bits over a link. It is generally shown as a negative exponent, (e.g. 10 -7 means that 1 in 10,000,000 bits are in error).
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System: Non-proprietary encryption from EBU (Tech3290).
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic states, 1 and 0. Measured in bit/s.
An 8-row by 8-column matrix of luminance sample values, or 64 DCT coefficients (source, quantised, or dequantised).
A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of the three) grouped and sold together, and identified in the SI as a group. A single service may be in several bouquets.
Bi-directionally Predictive Coded Picture/Frame: A picture that is coded using motion-compensated prediction from previous I or P frames (forward prediction) and/or future I or P frames (backward prediction). B frames are not used in any prediction.
Binary Phase Shift Keying: A data modulation technique.
A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of an electronic line such as (among others) a communications network, computer bus, or broadcast link. It is expressed in bits per second, bytes per second or in Hertz (cycles per second). When expressed in Hertz, the frequency may be a greater number than the actual bits per second, because the bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies transmitted. High bandwidth allows fast transmission or high-volume transmission.
Each byte is delivered separately in the ASI Transport Stream, with stuffing data added between the Bytes to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit/s. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI) Layer-2 Transport
Protocol.
Conditional Access: The technology used to control the access to viewing services to authorised subscribers through the transmission of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their decryption by a system such as viewing cards.
Conditional Access Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data. Mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance if CA is in use.
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the frequency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz.
Used by communications satellites. Preferred in tropical climates because it is not susceptible to fading.
See: ITU-R.
See: ITU-T.
A narrow range of frequencies, part of a frequency band, for the transmission of radio and television signals without interference from other channels.
In the case of OFDM, a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies are allocated to a channel.
A way of encoding data in a communications channel that adds patterns of redundancy into the transmission path in order to improve the error rate. Such methods are widely used in wireless communications.
The colour part of a TV picture signal, relating to the hue and saturation but not to the luminance (brightness) of the signal. In a composite-coded colour system, the colour information (chrominance, often referred to as chroma) is modulated onto a high frequency carrier and added to the monochrome-format video signal carrying the luminance (Y). In a component-coded colour system, the two colour-difference signals (R-Y)(B-Y) usually referred to as C
R
C
B
(digital) or P
R
P
B
(analogue), are used to convey colour information. When C
R
C
B
(P
R
P
B
) is added to the luminance (Y), the complete picture information is conveyed as YC
R
C
B
(YP
R
P
B
).
A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analogue transmissions.
Create Once Distribute Everywhere.
The combination of an Encoder and a complementary Decoder located respectively at the input and output of a transmission path.
Coded OFDM: COFDM adds forward error correction to the OFDM transmission consisting of Reed-Solomon
(RS) coding followed by convolutional coding to add extra bits to the transmitted signal. This allows a large number of errors at the receive end to be corrected by convolutional (Viterbi) decoding followed by RS decoding.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
CVCT dB
DCE
DCT
Compression
Compression System
C
R
C
CRC
DDS
B
Decoder
Decoding Time-stamp
DID
Differential Coding
DIL
DIN
Dolby Digital
Downlink
Downconvert
DPCM
DSNG
DSP
DTE
DTH
DTS
DVB
DVB SI
DVB-PI
Glossary
Reduction in the number of bits used to represent the same information. For the purposes of a broadcast system, it is the process of reducing digital picture information by discarding redundant portions of information that are not required when reconstituting the picture to produce viewing clarity. Compression allows a higher bite-rate to be transmitted through a given bandwidth.
Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video / audio / data bit-streams, together with the authorisation stream. The multiplexed data stream is then ready for transmission.
Digital Colour difference signals. These signals, in combination with the luminance signal (Y), define the colour and brightness of each picture element (pixel) on a TV line. See: Chrominance
Cyclic Redundancy Check: A mathematical algorithm that computes a numerical value based on the bits in a block of data. This number is transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information and the same algorithm to ensure the accurate delivery of data by comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If a mismatch occurs, an error in transmission is presumed.
Cable Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
Decibels: A ratio of one quantity to another using logarithmic scales to give results related to human aural or visual perception. dB is a ratio whereas dBm, for example, is an absolute value, quoted as a ratio to a fixed point of 0 dBm. 0 dBm is 1 mW at 1 kHz terminated in 600Ω. 0 dBmV is 1 mV terminated in 75Ω.
Data Communications Equipment: Typically a modem. It establishes, maintains and terminates a session on a network but in itself is not the source (originator) or destination (end receiving unit) of signals (e.g. a computer, see
DTE). A DCE device may also convert signals to comply with the transmission path (network) format.
Discrete Cosine Transform: A technique for expressing a waveform as a weighted sum of cosines. Raw video data is not readily compressible. DCT is not in itself a compression technique but is used to process the video data so that it is compressible by an encoder. DCT processes the picture on an 8x8-pixel block basis, converting the data from an uncompressible X Y form (as displayed by an oscilloscope) to a compressible frequency domain form
(as displayed by a spectrum analyser). Can be forward DCT or inverse DCT.
Direct Digital Synthesiser.
The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode encrypted signals. Some Decoders are separate from the receiver but in satellite TV broadcasting, the term is often used interchangeably as a name for an
Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD). The term IRD, or IRD / Decoder, is usually associated with satellite TV broadcasting while Cable systems are based on Converters or on Set-Top Boxes / Converters.
A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target Decoder.
Data Identifier.
Method of coding using the difference between the value of a sample and a predicted value.
Dual In Line: The most common type of package for small and medium scale integrated circuits. The pins hang vertically from the two long sides of the rectangular package, spaced at intervals of 0.1 inch.
Deutsches Institut für Normung: German Standards Institute.
Formerly AC-3. An audio coding system based on transform coding techniques and psychoacoustic principles.
The part of the satellite communications circuit that extends from the satellite to an Earth station.
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a lower frequency range.
Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An audio digitisation technique that codes the difference between samples rather than coding an absolute measurement at each sample point.
Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
Digital Signal Processor.
Data circuit Terminating Equipment: A communications device that originates (is the source) or is the end receiving unit (destination) of signals on a network. It is typically a terminal or computer.
Direct To Home. The term used to describe uninterrupted transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber, that is, no intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilised.
Digital Theater Systems: A motion picture digital sound system.
Digital Video Broadcasting: A European project which has defined transmission standards for digital broadcasting systems using satellite (DVB-S), cable (DVB-C) and terrestrial (DVB-T) medium, created by the
EP-DVB group and approved by the ITU. Specifies modulation, error correction, etc. (see EN 300 421 for satellite,
EN 300 429 for cable and EN 300 744 for terrestrial).
Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
DVB-Professional Interfaces: TTV Lan search shows – DVB Physical Interfaces
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page A-3
Glossary
Earth
EBU
ECM
EDI
EIA
EIT
Footprint
FTP
G.703
GOP
GUI
HDTV
HPA
HSYNC
Hub
ICAM
IEC
Page A-4
ETS
ETSI
FCC
FDM
FEC
Elementary Stream
EMC
EMM
Encryption
EPG
Ethernet
FFT
FIFO
Technical Earth: Ensures that all equipment chassis within a rack are at the same potential, usually by connecting a wire between the Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack. This is sometimes known as a Functional earth.
Protective Earth: Used for electric shock protection. This is sometimes known as a safety earth.
European Broadcast Union.
Entitlement Control Message.
Ethernet Data Input
Electronics Industries Association (USA).
Event Information Table: Equipment: A component of the DVB-Service Information (SI) stream generated within an Encoder, containing information about events or programmes such as event name, start time, duration, etc.
System: EIT (Present/Following) contains the name of the current and next event. It may include an optional descriptor (synopsis) giving brief details of content. EIT (Schedule) is used to produce a full EPG. The EIT is the only DVB-SI table, which can be encrypted.
A generic term for a coded bit-stream, be it video, audio or other.
Electromagnetic Compatibility.
Entitlement Management Message.
Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate decryption equipment and authorisation.
Electronic Programme Guide: On-screen programme listing using thumbnail pictures and/or text.
The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE as the 802.3 standard. Transmission speeds vary according to the configuration. Ethernet uses copper or fibre-optic cables.
European Telecommunications Standard.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
Federal Communications Commission.
Frequency Division Multiplex: A common communication channel for a number of signals, each with its own allotted frequency.
Forward Error Correction: A method of catching errors in a transmission. The data is processed through an algorithm that adds extra bits and sends these with the transmitted data. The extra bits are then used at the receiving end to check the accuracy of the transmission and correct any errors.
Fast Fourier Transformation: A fast algorithm for performing a discrete Fourier transform.
First In, First Out: A data structure or hardware buffer from which items are taken out in the same order they were put in. Also known as a shelf from the analogy with pushing items onto one end of a shelf so that they fall off the other. A FIFO is useful for buffering a stream of data between a sender and receiver that are not synchronised
- i.e. they not sending and receiving at exactly the same rate.
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by a satellite’s downlink transmission. Also (generally) the area from which the satellite can receive uplink transmissions.
File Transfer Protocol:
A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP/IP network (Internet, UNIX, etc.). For example, after developing the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine, they are typically uploaded to the
Web server, using FTP. Unlike e-mail programs in which graphics and program files have to be attached, FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the overhead of encoding and decoding the data.
The ITU-T standard which defines the physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
Group of Pictures: MPEG video compression works more effectively by processing a number of video frames as a block. The TANDBERG Television Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP; every twelfth frame is an I frame.
Graphical User Interface: The use of pictures rather than just words to represent the input and output of a program. A program with a GUI runs under a windowing system and has a screen interface capable of displaying graphics in the form of icons, drop-down menus and a movable pointer. The on-screen information is usually controlled / manipulated by a mouse or keyboard.
High Definition Television.
High Power Amplifier: Used in the signal path to amplify the modulated and up-converted broadcast signal for feeding to the uplink antenna.
Horizontal (line) SYNCs.
A device in a multipoint network at which branch nodes interconnect.
Integrated Conditional Access Module: Embedded in the IRD and responsible for descrambling, plus packet filtering and reception. It also contains the physical interface to the subscriber’s viewing card.
International Electrotechnical Committee.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
IF
Interframe Coding
Intraframe Coding
IP
I-picture; I-frame
IPPV
IRD
IRE
ISDN
ISO
ISOG
ITS
ITT
ITU-R
ITU-T
JPEG kbit/s
Kbit
Ku-band
LAN
L-band
LED
LNB
LO
LSB
Luminance
Intermediate Frequency: Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz output of the Modulator in cable, satellite and terrestrial transmission applications.
Compression coding involving consecutive frames. When consecutive frames are compared, temporal redundancy is used to remove common elements (information) and arrive at difference information. MPEG-2 uses B and P frames, but since they are individually incomplete and relate to other adjacent frames, they cannot be edited independently.
Compression coding involving a single frame. Redundant information is removed on a per frame basis. All other frames are ignored. Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information only from that macroblock or picture.
Exploits spatial redundancy by using DCT to produce I frames; these are independent frames and can be edited.
Internet Protocol: The IP part of TCP/IP. IP implements the network layer (layer 3) of the protocol, which contains a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or sub-network. IP accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP or UDP), adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data link protocol. It may also break the packet into fragments to support the Maximum Transmission / Transfer Unit
(MTU) of the network.
Intracoded Picture/Frame: A picture / frame, which is coded using purely intracoding with reference to no other field or frame information. The I frame is used as a reference for other compression methods.
Impulse Pay Per View: One-time events, purchased at home (on impulse) using a prearranged SMS credit line.
Integrated Receiver Decoder: The Receiver with an internal MPEG Decoder, which is connected to the subscriber’s TV. The IRD is responsible for receiving and de-multiplexing all signals. The unit receives the incoming signal and if CA is active, decodes the signal when provided with a control word by the viewing card.
Domestic IRDs are also known as Set-Top Units or Set-Top Boxes.
Institute of Radio Engineers: No longer in existence but the name lives on as a unit of video amplitude measurement. This unit is 1% of the range between blanking a peak white for a standard amplitude signal.
Integrated Services Digital Network: The basic ISDN service is BRI (Basic Rate Interface), which is made up of two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel (2B+D). If both channels are combined into one, called
bonding, the total data rate becomes 128 kbit/s and is four and a half times the bandwidth of a V.34 modem
(28.8 kbit/s).
The ISDN high-speed service is PRI (Primary Rate Interface). It provides 23 B channels and one 64 kbit/s D channel (23B+D), which is equivalent to the 24 channels of a T1 line. When several channels are bonded together, high data rates can be achieved. For example, it is common to bond six channels for quality videoconferencing at
384 kbit/s. In Europe, PRI includes 30 B channels and one D channel, equivalent to an E1 line.
International Standards Organisation.
Inter-union Satellite Operations Group.
Insertion Test Signal: A suite of analogue test signals placed on lines in the VBI. Also known as VITS.
Invitation To Tender.
International Telecommunications Union - Radiocommunications Study Groups (was CCIR).
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications Standardisation Sector (was CCITT).
Joint Photographic Experts Group: ISO/ITU standard for compressing still images. It has a high compression capability. Using discrete cosine transform, it provides user specified compression ratios up to around 100:1 (there is a trade-off between image quality and file size).
1000 bits per second.
1024 bits, usually refers to memory capacity or allocation.
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to
14 GHz. Used by communications satellites. Preferred for DTH applications because this range of frequency is less susceptible to interference.
Local Area Network: A network, which provides facilities for communications within a defined building or group of buildings in close proximity.
The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz, which is the normal input-frequency-range of a domestic IRD.
The incoming signal from the satellite is down-converted to L-band by the LNB.
Light Emitting Diode.
Low Noise Block Down-Converter: The component of a subscriber satellite transmission receiving dish which amplifies the incoming signal and down-converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the IRD (typically 950 MHz -
1600 MHz).
Local Oscillator.
Least significant bit.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Glossary
The television signal representing brightness, or the amount of light at any point in a picture. The Y in YC
R
C
B.
Page A-5
Network
NICAM
NIT nm
NTSC
Glossary
LVDS
Macroblock
Mbit/s
MCC
MCPC
MEM
MMDS
Motion Compensation
Motion Estimation
Motion Vector
MP@ML
MP@HL
MPEG
MPEG-2
MSB
Msymbol/s
Multiplex
MUSICAM
Mux
Page A-6
Low Voltage Differential Signal: LVDS is a generic multi-purpose Interface standard for high speed / low power data transmission. It was standardised in ANSI/TIA/EIA-644-1995 Standard (aka RS-644).
A 16x16-pixel area of the TV picture. Most processing within the MPEG domain takes place with macro blocks.
These are converted to four 8x8 blocks using either frame DCT or field DCT. Four 8 x 8 blocks of luminance data and two (4:2:0 chrominance format), four (4:2:2) or eight (4:4:4) corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance data coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component of the picture. Macroblock can be used to refer to the sample data and to the coded representation of the sample values and other data elements.
Million bits per second.
Multiplex Control Computer: A component of a System 3000 compression system. The MCC sets up the configuration for the System 3000 Multiplexers under its control. The MCC controls both the main and backup
Multiplexer for each transport stream.
Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
Multiplex Element Manager: A GUI based control system, part of the range of TANDBERG Television compression system control element products. The evolution 5000 MEM holds a model of the system hardware.
Using this model, it controls the individual system elements to configure the output multiplexes from the incoming elementary streams. The MEM monitors the equipment status and controls any redundancy switching.
Multichannel Microwave Distribution System: A terrestrial microwave direct-to-home broadcast transmission system.
The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of sample values. The prediction uses motion vectors to provide offsets into the past and/or future reference frames or fields containing previously decoded sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensation that provides an offset from the co-ordinate position in the current picture or field to the co-ordinates in a reference frame or field.
Main Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 15 Mbit/s over various mediums.
Main Profile at High Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 80 Mbit/s over various mediums.
Moving Pictures Experts Group: The name of the ISO/IEC working group, which sets up the international standards for digital television source coding.
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimise video signal bit-rate in preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818. The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bit-rates and picture resolutions.
Most significant bit.
(Msym/s) Mega (million) Symbols per second (10
6
Symbols per second).
A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 12), from encoders, that are compressed together in a single
DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.
Masking pattern adapted Universal Sub-band Integrated Coding And Multiplexing: An audio bit-rate reduction system relying on sub-band coding and psychoacoustic masking.
Multiplexer: Transmission Multiplexer: receives EMMs from the ACC, ECMs from the BCC, video/audio data from the encoders, and the SI stream from the SIC. It then multiplexes them all into a single DVB-compliant transport stream, and delivers the signal to the uplink after modulation.
The Multiplexer also contains the cypher card, which scrambles the services according to the control words supplied by the BCC.
In the context of broadcasting: a collection of MPEG-2 transport stream multiplexes transmitted on a single delivery system, for example, all digital channels on a specific cable system.
Near Instantaneously Companded Audio Multiplex: Official name is NICAM 728. Used for digital stereo sound broadcasting in the UK employing compression techniques to deliver very near CD quality audio.
728 refers to the bit-rate in kbit/s.
Network Information Table: Part of the service information data. The NIT provides information about the physical organisation of each transport stream multiplex, and the characteristics of the network itself (such as the actual frequencies and modulation being used).
Nanometre: a unit of length equal to one thousand millionth (10
-9
) of a metre.
National Television Systems Committee: The group, which developed analogue standards used in television broadcast systems in the United States. Also adopted in other countries (e.g. Mexico, Canada, Japan). This system uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz field frequency.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
PAT
PCM
PCR
PDC
Pel
OPPV
OSD
Packet
PAL
NVOD
NVRAM
OFDM
PES
PID
PIN
Pixel pk-pk
PLL
PMT
P-picture/P-frame ppm
PPV
Program
Glossary
Near Video On Demand: Method of offering multiple showings of movies or events. The showings are timed to start at set intervals, determined by the broadcaster. Each showing of a movie or event can be sold to subscribers separately.
Non-volatile Random Access Memory: Memory devices (permitting random read / write access) that do not lose their information when power is removed. Stores the default configuration parameters set by the user.
Orthogonal FDM: A modulation technique used for digital TV transmission in Europe, Japan and Australia; more spectrally efficient than FDM. In OFDM, data is distributed over a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies. The carriers are arranged with overlapping sidebands in such a way that the signals can be received without adjacent channel interference.
Order ahead Pay Per View: An advance purchase of encrypted one-time events with an expiry date.
On-screen display: Messages and graphics, typically originating from the SMS, and displayed on the subscriber’s
TV screen by the IRD, to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber to contact the SMS.
A unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network. A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from an elementary data stream.
Phase Alternating Line: A colour TV broadcasting system where the phase of the R-Y colour-difference signal is inverted on every alternate line to average out errors providing consistent colour reproduction.
Program Association Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for
MPEG-2 compliance. The PAT points (maps) to the PMT.
Pulse Code Modulation: A process in which a signal is sampled, each sample is quantised independently of other samples, and the resulting succession of quantised values is encoded into a digital signal.
Program Clock Reference: A time-stamp in the transport stream from which the Decoder timing is derived.
Programme Delivery Control (VBI): A Teletext service allowing simple programming (i.e. VideoPlus) of VCR recording times. If the desired program is rescheduled, PDC updates the programming information in the VCR.
Picture Element: Also known as a pixel. The smallest resolvable rectangular area of an image either on a screen or stored in memory. On screen, pixels are made up of one or more dots of colour. Monochrome and grey-scale systems use one dot per pixel. For grey-scale, the pixel is energised with different intensities, creating a range from dark to light (a scale of 0-255 for an eight-bit pixel). Colour systems use a red, green and blue dot per pixel, each of which is energised to different intensities, creating a range of colours perceived as the mixture of these dots. If all three dots are dark, the result is black. If all three dots are bright, the result is white.
Packetised Elementary Stream: A sequential stream of data bytes that has been converted from original elementary streams of audio and video access units and transported as packets. Each PES packet consists of a header and a payload of variable length and subject to a maximum of 64 kbytes. A time-stamp is provided by the
MPEG-2 systems layer to ensure correct synchronisation between related elementary streams at the Decoder.
Packet Identifier: The header on a packet in an elementary data stream, which identifies that data stream. An
MPEG-2 / DVB standard.
Personal Identification Number: A password used to control access to programming and to set purchase limits.
Each subscriber household can activate several PINs and may use them to set individual parental rating or spending limits for each family member.
PIX (picture) Element: The digital representation of the smallest area of a television picture capable of being delineated by the bit-stream. See Pel for more information.
peak to peak: Measurement of a signal or waveform from its most negative point to its most positive point.
Phase-Locked Loop. A phase-locked loop is a control system which controls the rotation of an object by comparing its rotational position (phase) with another rotating object as in the case of a sine wave or other repeating signal. This type of control system can synchronise not only the speed, but also the angular position of two waveforms that are not derived from the same source.
Program Map Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance. Each service has a PMT, which lists the component parts (elementary streams of video, audio, etc.) for the various services being transmitted.
A picture / frame produced using forward prediction. It contains predictions from either previous I frames or previous P frames. The P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames.
Parts per million.
Pay Per View: A system of payment for viewing services based on a usage / event basis rather than on on-going subscription. Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that they wish to view. PPV events may be purchased as IPPV or OPPV.
PC - A sequence of instructions for a computer.
TV - A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818-1 (MPEG-2). For a transport stream, the timebase is defined by the PCR. The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual channel within the stream.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page A-7
Glossary
Programme
P
R
P
B
PROM
RAM
RAS
RF
ROM
PS
PSI
PSIP
PSK
PSR
PSU
PTS
QAM
QPSK
QSIF
Quantise
RS
SDI
SDT
SELV
STB
RLC
SCPC
Spectral Scrambling
Scrambling
STT
SFN
Page A-8
A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster. For example, football match, news, film show.
In the MPEG-2 concept, the collection of elementary streams comprising the programme, have a common start and end time. A series of programmes are referred to as events.
Analogue Colour difference signals. Refer to C
R
C
B
for an explanation.
Programmable Read-Only Memory: A device, which may be written once with data for permanent storage, and then read whenever required. Special types of PROM permit the erasure of all data by Ultraviolet light (EPROM) or by application of an electronic signal (EEPROM).
Program Stream: A combination of one or more PESs with a common timebase.
Program Specific Information: Consists of normative data, which is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport streams and the successful regeneration of programs. (See also: SI).
Program System Information Protocol: The ATSC equivalent of SI for DVB.
Phase Shift Keying: A method of modulating digital signals particularly suited to satellite transmission.
Professional Satellite Receiver: See also: IRD.
Power Supply Unit.
Presentation Time Stamp (ATSC).
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation: A method of modulating digital signals, which uses combined techniques of phase modulation and amplitude modulation. It is particularly suited to cable networks.
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying: A form of phase shift keying modulation using four states.
Quarter Screen Image Format.
A process of converting analogue waveforms to digital information. 8-bit quantisation as set out in ITU-R Rec. 601.
uses 256 levels in the range 0 – 255 to determine the analogue waveform value at any given point. The value is then converted to a digital number for processing in the digital domain.
Random Access Memory: A volatile storage device for digital data. Data may be written to, or read from, the device as often as required. When power is removed, the data it contains is lost.
Remote Authorization System: A TANDBERG TV proprietary public-key encryption system used to prevent unauthorized viewing of a TV programme or programmes.
Radio Frequency.
Read Only Memory: A non-volatile storage device for digital data. Data has been stored permanently in this device. No further information may be stored (written) there and the data it holds cannot be erased. Data may be read as often as required.
Reed-Solomon coding: An error detection and correction, coding system. 16 bytes of Reed-Solomon Forward
Error Correction code are appended to the packet before transmission, bringing the packet length to 204 bytes.
The 16 bytes are used at the receiving end to correct any errors. Up to eight corrupted bytes can be corrected.
Run Length Coding: Minimisation of the length of a bit-stream by replacing repeated characters with an instruction of the form ‘repeat character x y times’.
Single Channel Per Carrier.
A process (in digital transmission) used to combine a digital signal with a pseudo-random sequence, producing a randomised digital signal that conveys the original information in a form optimised for a broadcast channel.
Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent unauthorised reception of the information in clear form.
Serial Digital Interface.
Service Description Table: Provides information in the SI stream about the services in the system; for example, the name of the service, the service provider, etc.
Safety Extra Low Voltage (EN 60950).
Set-Top Box: A box that sits on top of a television set and is the interface between the home television and the cable TV company. New technologies evolving for set-top boxes are video-on-demand, video games, educational services, database searches, and home shopping. The cable equivalent of the IRD.
System Time Table (ATSC).
Single Frequency Network: The SFN technique allows large geographic areas to be served with a common transmission multiplex. All transmitters in the network are synchronously modulated with the same signal and they all radiate on the same frequency. Due to the multi-path capability of the multi-carrier transmission system
(COFDM), signals from several transmitters arriving at a receiving antenna may contribute constructively to the total wanted signal. The SFN technique is not only frequency efficient but also power efficient because fades in the field strength of one transmitter may be filled by another transmitter.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
SI
Single Packet Burst Mode
Smart Card
SMATV
SMPTE
SMS
SNG
SNMP
Spatial Redundancy
SPI
Statistical Redundancy
TAXI
TCP / IP
TDM
TDT
Temporal Redundancy
Time-stamp
TOT
Transport Stream
Transport Stream Packet
Header
TS
TSDT
TSP
TVCT
U
Glossary
Service Information: Digital information describing the delivery system, content and scheduling (timing) of broadcast data streams. DVB-SI data provides information to enable the IRD to automatically demultiplex and decode the various streams of programmes within the multiplex.
Specified in ISO/IEC 13818[1]. (DVB)
A burst of ASI bytes (either 188 or 204, depending on packet length) is contiguously grouped into an MPEG-2
Transport Stream packet. Stuffing data is added between the packets to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit/s. See
DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI) Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
A plastic card with a built-in microprocessor and memory used for identification, financial transactions or other authorising data transfer. When inserted into a reader, data is transferred to and from the host machine or a central computer. It is more secure than a magnetic stripe card and it can be disabled if the wrong password is entered too many times. As a financial transaction card, it can be loaded with digital money and used in the same way as cash until the balance reaches zero. The file protocol is specific to its intended application.
Satellite Mast Antenna Television: A distribution system, which provides sound and television signals to the households of a building or group of buildings, typically used to refer to an apartment block.
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.
Subscriber Management System: A system which handles the maintenance, billing, control and general supervision of subscribers to conditional access technology viewing services provided through cable and satellite broadcasting.
An SMS can be an automatic (e.g. Syntellect) system where subscribers order entitlements by entering information via a telephone. Alternatively, an SMS can be a manual system, which requires subscribers to speak with an operator who then manually enters their entitlement requests. Some systems support multiple SMSs.
Satellite News-Gathering.
Simple Network Management Protocol.
Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and/or chrominance characteristics within a single frame.
Removed using DCT and Quantisation (Intra-Frame Coding).
Synchronous Parallel Interface.
Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly occurring events, thereby reducing the overall bit-rate. Removed using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding.
Transparent Asynchronous Tx / Rx Interface: A proprietary high-speed data interface.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: A set of communications protocols that may be used to connect different types of computers over networks.
Time Division Multiplex: One common, communications channel carrying a number of signals, each with its own allotted time slot.
Time and Date Table: Part of the DVB Service Information. The TDT gives information relating to the present time and date.
Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between successive frames. Removed using motion estimation and compensation (Inter-Frame Coding).
A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival of a byte or the presentation of a presentation unit.
Time Offset Table: This optional SI table supports the use of local offsets as well as the UTC time/date combination.
The purpose of the table is to list by country the current offset from UTC and the next expected change to that offset (to track when daylight saving occurs).
The offset resolution is to within 1 minute over a range of ±12 hours from UTC.
A set of packetised elementary data streams and SI streams, which may comprise more than one programme, but with common synchronisation and error protection. The data structure is defined in ISO/IEC 13818-1 [1] and is the basis of the ETSI Digital Video Broadcasting standards.
A data structure used to convey information about the transport stream payload.
Transport Stream.
Transport Stream Descriptor Table: A component of the MPEG-2 PSI data. This table describes which type of
Transport stream it is in (i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.
Transport Stream Processor.
Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
44.45 mm (rack height standard).
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page A-9
Glossary
UART
UHF
Upconvert
Uplink
UPS
UTC
VCT
VHF
VITC
VITS
VPS
WSS
WST
XILINX
Y (Luminance)
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter: A device providing a serial interface for transmitting and receiving data.
Ultra High Frequency: A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum covering 300 MHz to 3000 MHz (3 GHz).
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a higher frequency range.
The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the Earth to the satellite.
Uninterruptable Power Supply: A method of supplying backup power when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes; enough to power down the computer in an orderly manner. This is particularly important where write back cache is used.
Write back cache is where modified data intended for the disk, is temporarily stored in RAM and can be lost in the event of a power failure. Sophisticated systems are tied to electrical generators that can provide power for days.
UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may provide voltage regulation.
Universal Time Co-ordinate: An internationally agreed basis for timekeeping introduced in 1972 and based on international atomic time (corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time or GMT).
Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
Very High Frequency: A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum covering 30 MHz to 300 MHz.
Vertical Interval Time Code.
Vertical Interval Test Signal: See: ITS.
Video Programming System: A German precursor to PDC
Wide Screen Switching: Data used in wide-screen analogue services, which enables a receiver to select the appropriate picture display mode.
World System Teletext: System B Teletext. Used in 625 line / 50 Hz television systems (ITU-R 653).
A type of programmable Integrated Circuit.
Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line. The only signal required for black and white pictures.
Page A-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Annex B
B.
Technical Specification
Contents
B.1 General Information ..................................................B-3
B.1.1 Model Availability..........................................B-3
B.1.2 Video.............................................................B-4
Supported Video Resolutions .......................B-4
Supported Video Bit-rates.............................B-4
B.1.3 International Television Standards ...............B-4
Supported Standards....................................B-4
Performance Figures ....................................B-5
Vertical Blanking Signals ..............................B-5
B.1.4 Audio Performance.......................................B-6
Supported Audio Specifications....................B-6
Supported Audio Bit-rates.............................B-6
Analogue Audio Performance.......................B-6
Digital Audio Outputs....................................B-6
B.2 Internal Decoder........................................................B-7
B.2.1 Introduction...................................................B-7
B.2.2 Alteia and A Variant......................................B-7
B.2.3 Alteia plus .....................................................B-7
B.3 Input Specifications...................................................B-8
B.3.1 Decoders ......................................................B-8
Models ..........................................................B-8
DVB SPI........................................................B-8
DVB ASI Optical ...........................................B-8
DVB ASI Copper...........................................B-8
B.3.2 Satellite Receivers QPSK/8PSK...................B-9
B.3.3 Satellite Receivers QPSK/BPSK.................B-10
B.3.4 LNB Power and Control..............................B-12
B.3.5 Terrestrial Receivers...................................B-12
Models ........................................................B-12
UHF Input Specification..............................B-12
Net Input Data Rates ..................................B-13
Baseband Connector ................................. B-13
B.3.6 Digital ENG Receivers ............................... B-14
Models........................................................ B-14
IF Input Specification.................................. B-14
Net Input Data Rates.................................. B-14
B.3.7 Frame Sync Connector (Alteia plus Only).. B-14
B.4 Output Specifications.............................................. B-15
B.4.1 Transport Stream Output ........................... B-15
B.4.2 Video Outputs ............................................ B-15
Analogue Composite Video........................ B-15
Digital Video............................................... B-16
Video Test (Monitor) Connector................. B-16
B.4.3 Audio Outputs ............................................ B-16
Analogue Audio.......................................... B-16
Digital Audio............................................... B-17
Audio Monitor............................................. B-17
Supported Audio Modes............................. B-17
B.4.4 Data Outputs.............................................. B-18
RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data.. B-18
RS-422 Synchronous (High-speed) Data... B-18
B.4.5 Auxiliary Relay Interface ............................ B-18
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Output ....... B-18
Discrete Control and Summary Alarm
Relays ........................................................ B-19
B.4.6 Remote Control Connector (R CTRL RS-
232/485)..................................................... B-19
B.5 Environmental......................................................... B-19
B.5.1 Conditions .................................................. B-19
B.5.2 Physical...................................................... B-19
B.6 Power Supply ......................................................... B-20
B.7 Compliance............................................................. B-21
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-1
Technical Specification
B.7.1 Safety......................................................... B-21
B.7.2 EMC ........................................................... B-21
B.7.3 CE Marking ................................................ B-22
B.7.4 C-Tick Mark................................................ B-22
List of Tables
Table B.1: Model Availability ......................................................... B-3
Table B.2: Supported Video Resolutions ...................................... B-4
Table B.3: Supported Video Bit-rates............................................ B-4
Table B.4: International Television Standards............................... B-5
Table B.5: Alteia Video Performance ............................................ B-5
Table B.6: Supported Audio Specifications................................... B-6
Table B.7: Supported Audio Data Bit-rates (MPEG-2) .................. B-6
Table B.8: Analogue Audio Performance ...................................... B-6
Table B.9: Output Transport Bit-rate against Incoming Video
Bit-rate.......................................................................... B-7
Table B.10: Maximum User Bit-rates (Software version 2.3
and later) ...................................................................... B-7
Table B.11: DVB-SPI: M2/PDU/942 .............................................. B-8
Table B.12: DVB ASI Optical: M2/PDU/942[B].............................. B-8
Table B.13: DVB-ASI Copper: M2/PDU/942[B][C][D].................... B-8
Table B.14: P8R Satellite Receiver Input Specification:
QPSK/8PSK................................................................. B-9
Table B.15: PSR Satellite Receiver Input Specification:
QPSK/BPSK............................................................... B-10
Table B.16: L-band Satellite Input — Eb/N
0
Ratio: QPSK, all
M2/PSR models ......................................................... B-11
Table B.17: L-band Satellite Input — Eb/N
0
Ratio:
8PSK/QPSK, all M2/PSR models .............................. B-11
Table B.18: LNB Power and Control ........................................... B-12
Table B.19: Terrestrial Receiver UHF Input Specifications:
M2/PTR/942 and M2/PTR/948[A] .............................. B-12
Table B.20: Terrestrial Receiver Useful Data Rates:
M2/PTR/94x[A]........................................................... B-13
Table B.21: Terrestrial Receiver Baseband Connector:
M2/PTR/94x[A]........................................................... B-13
Table B.22: Digital ENG Receiver IF Input Specifications:
M2/PTRE/94x[C] ........................................................ B-14
Table B.23: Frame Sync Connector (Alteia plus Only)................ B-14
Table B.24: DVB-SPI Parallel Transport Stream Output
Connector................................................................... B-15
Table B.25: Analogue Video Output Connector .......................... B-15
Table B.26: Digital Video Output Connector................................ B-16
Table B.27: Video Test (Monitor) Connector............................... B-16
Table B.28: Analogue Audio Output Connector .......................... B-16
Table B.29: Digital Audio Output Connector................................ B-17
Table B.30: Audio Monitor Connector ......................................... B-17
Table B.31: Supported Audio Output Modes............................... B-17
Table B.32: RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data
Connector................................................................... B-18
Table B.33: RS-422 Synchronous (High-speed) Data
Connector................................................................... B-18
Table B.34: Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Output..................... B-18
Table B.35: Discrete Control and Summary Alarm Relays.......... B-19
Table B.36: Remote Control Connector ...................................... B-19
Table B.37: Environmental Conditions ........................................ B-19
Table B.38: Physical Parameters ................................................ B-19
Table B.39: Power Supply Specifications.................................... B-20
Page B-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
B.1 General Information
B.1.1 Model Availability
Due to continuing development and improvement, models become obsolete and are replaced. Table B.1 lists the availability of models by
Marketing Code. (See Table 1.1 in Chapter 1 for an explanation of the
Marketing Code components.)
Table B.1: Model Availability
Product
Decoders
Satellite
Receivers
Terrestrial
Receivers
Range
8PSK
Capable
QPSK
Capable
UHF/VHF
Digital ENG
Marketing Code
Alteia M2/PDU/942
Alteia plus M2/PDU/942B
M2/PDU/942C
M2/PDU/942D
Alteia M2/P8R/942
M2/P8R/942A
Alteia plus M2/P8R/942B
M2/P8R/942C
Alteia
M2/P8R/942D
M2/PSR/932
M2/PSR/932C
M2/PSR/942
M2/PSR/942A
Alteia plus M2/PSR/942B
M2/PSR/942C
M2/PSR/942D
Alteia
Alteia
M2/PTR/942
M2/PTR/948
M2/PTR/948A
M2/PTRE/942
M2/PTRE/942B
Alteia plus M2/PTRE/948C
M2/PTRE/948CVL
Availability
Current
Superseded
Superseded
Current
Obsolete
Superseded
Superseded
Superseded
Current
Obsolete
Obsolete
Obsolete
Superseded
Superseded
Superseded
Current
Obsolete
Obsolete
Current
Current
Obsolete
Current
Current
Comments
Replaced by M2/PDU/942C (S/W version 2.5
®)
Replaced by M2/P8R/942D (S/W version 2.8
®)
Replaced by M2/P8R/942C (S/W version 2.4
®)
Replaced by M2/P8R/942C (S/W version 2.4
®)
Replaced by M2/P8R/942D (S/W version 2.8
®)
Replaced by M2/PSR/942C (S/W version 2.4
®)
Replaced by M2/PSR/942C (S/W version 2.4
®)
Replaced by M2/PSR/942D (S/W version 2.8
®)
Obsolete from July 1999.
Also accepts 70 MHz input
Replaced by M2/PTRE/948C
For use with Voyager Lite
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-3
Technical Specification
B.1.2 Video
Supported Video Resolutions
Table B.2: Supported Video Resolutions
625-line, 25 frame/s
720 pixels x 608 active lines
720 pixels x 576 active lines
704 pixels x 576 active lines
544 pixels x 576 active lines
480 pixels x 576 active lines
352 pixels x 576 active lines
352 pixels x 288 active lines
525-line, 30 (29.97) frame/s
720 pixels x 512 active lines
720 pixels x 480 active lines
704 pixels x 480 active lines
544 pixels x 480 active lines
480 pixels x 480 active lines
352 pixels x 480 active lines
352 pixels x 240 active lines
Supported Video Bit-rates
Table B.3: Supported Video Bit-rates
4:2:2 mode only
ü
ï
ï
þ
ý
4:2:0 and 4:2:2 modes
ï
4:2:2 Format
Alteia plus Models
50 Mbit/s
Non-B suffix Models
40 Mbit/s
4:2:0 Format
All Models
15 Mbit/s
Alteia supports 4:2:0 Chroma Format at 422P@ML providing a video rate higher than 15 Mbit/s.
B.1.3 International Television Standards
Supported Standards
Up to two composite video outputs are provided at the rear panel. These carry identical video. The standard is selectable to PAL-B, -G, -I,
-N Combination, -N Normal, -M (PAL-M on D variants only) or NTSC-M
(with or without pedestal).
NOTE…
Be aware that although PAL-M may be selectable on earlier versions of Alteia, its performance is fully supported and guaranteed on D variants only.
Page B-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
Table B.4: International Television Standards
As indicated in Menus: M
Standard
Region
Lines / frame
Fields / second
Interlace
Frames / second
Lines / second
Aspect ratio
Video band (MHz)
RF band (MHz)
M N -------- B/G ------I
NTSC
USA/Japan
-------------------------------------------- PAL ----------------------------------------------------
South America,
Brazil
Argentina (combination)
Jamaica/Uruguay (normal)
Europe / Asia UK
525
60
2/1
30 (29.97)
15 750
4 / 3
4.2
6.0
525
60
2/1
30 (29.97)
15 750
4 / 3
4.2
6.0
625
50
2/1
¾
15 625
4 / 3
4.2
6.0
625
50
2/1
25
15 625 15 625
4 / 3
5.0
7.0
625
50
2/1
25
4 / 3
5.0
8.0
625
50
2/1
25
15 625
4 / 3
5.5
8.0
Performance Figures
1
Table B.5: Alteia Video Performance
Parameter
Luminance bar amplitude
White
Sync amplitude
Burst amplitude
Pedestal
Luminance bar tilt
2T K Response
Differential gain
Differential phase
Luminance non-linearity
Signal-to-noise luminance weighted 2
Chrominance - luminance gain
Chrominance - luminance delay
Chrominance to AM noise ratio
Chrominance to PM noise ratio
Luminance freq. response
Performance
PAL: 700 ±14 mV
1000
±14 mV
300 ±10 mV
300 ±10 mV
N/A
NTSC:
±2%
1.5%K
±2%
±1.5°
±4%
³60 dBw
±5%
±20 ns
³50 dBrms
³50 dBrms
0-4 MHz: ±0.2 dB; 4.8 MHz: ±1.5 dB
100 ±2 IRE
140
±3 IRE
40 ±1 IRE
40 ±1 IRE
7.5 ±1 IRE
Vertical Blanking Signals
The Alteia range of M2/Pxx/9x2 Receivers and Decoders support the following VBI reinsertion and signalling:
·
Closed Captioning (525-line sub-titling system)
·
Vertical Interval Test Signal (VITS) and Insertion Test Signal (ITS)
1
2
Measured with 1 metre RG-22 co-axial cable, 75 W terminated.
Signal-to-noise luminance weighted: measured on an active video line with unmodulated ramp video signal.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-5
Technical Specification
B.1.4 Audio Performance
Supported Audio Specifications
Table B.6: Supported Audio Specifications
Specification Description Availability
ISO/IEC 13818-3 Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated
Information: (MPEG-2) Audio
All models
ATSC A-52 Digital Audio Compression Standard (Dolby Digital AC-3) All models
SMPTE 302M-1998 Linear Audio S/W v2.1 – v2.5
SMPTE 302M-2000 Linear Audio S/W v2.8 and later
Supported Audio Bit-rates
Table B.7: Supported Audio Data Bit-rates (MPEG-2)
Mono kbit/s
32
48
56
64
80
Stereo kbit/s
64
96
112
128
160
Analogue Audio Performance
Table B.8: Analogue Audio Performance
Mono kbit/s
96
112
128
160
192
Stereo kbit/s
192
224
256
320
384
Parameter Performance
Voltage gain adjustment ± 3 dBm
Maximum undistorted output (terminated with 600 W) 21 dBm
Crosstalk 50 to 100 Hz: >80 dB
100 to 15 000 Hz: >60 dB
Frequency response 50 to 16 000 Hz: ±0.5 dB
Total harmonic distortion (THD), terminated in 600 W <0.5%
Signal-to-noise ratio (referenced to 1 kHz tone at +9 dBm out)
³ 70 dB
Audio Reference Level -9 dBm
Digital Audio Outputs
Digital audio outputs as fitted to M2/Pxx/94x models only, comply with
E1A-422
3
and have a maximum data rate of 3.072 Mbit/s.
3
EIA-422-A-1978: Electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits.
Page B-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
B.2 Internal Decoder
B.2.1 Introduction
The Alteia range of Receivers and Decoders contains an internal decoder.
This circuit incorporates a packet demultiplexer that selects audio, video and ancillary services from the stream received from the digital demodulator. These services are locked to the transmission rate using clock phase information from the incoming multiplex.
B.2.2 Alteia and A Variant
The maximum transport stream bit-rate that can be de-multiplexed is affected by the incoming video bit-rate. Table B.9 shows the effect of the transport stream output as a result of the incoming video bit-rate.
Table B.9: Output Transport Bit-rate against Incoming Video Bit-rate
Software Version 2.1 and 2.2
Incoming Video Bit-rate Transport Stream Maximum
Bit-rate
<30 Mbit/s
>30 Mbit/s
54 Mbit/s
50 Mbit/s
Software Version 2.3 and later
Incoming Video Bit-rate
<30 Mbit/s and PDU models
>30 Mbit/s
Transport Stream
Maximum Bit-rate
54 Mbit/s
50 Mbit/s
The decoder operates with user data rates (excluding Reed-Solomon overhead) as shown in Table B.10.
Table B.10: Maximum User Bit-rates (Software version 2.3 and later)
Code Rate
½ Rate FEC
2 /
3
Rate FEC
¾ Rate FEC
5
/
6
Rate FEC
7 /
8
Rate FEC
8 /
9
Rate FEC
User Input Bit-rate (Mbit/s)
QPSK symbol rate
1.0 MSym/s
0.92
1.23
1.38
1.54
1.61
—
44.5 MSym/s
41.01
54.68
61.51
68.34
71.76
—
8PSK symbol rate
3.0 MSym/s 30 MSym/s 28.125 MSym/s
—
—
—
6.91
—
7.37
—
—
—
69.11
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
69.11
B.2.3 Alteia plus
The Transport Stream bit-rate in the Alteia plus versions is not dependent on the incoming video bit-rate.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-7
Technical Specification
B.3 Input Specifications
B.3.1 Decoders
Models
This section applies to models M2/PDU/942[B][C][D].
DVB SPI
Table B.11: DVB-SPI: M2/PDU/942
Input
Connector type
Data rate range
Signal levels
Clock and Data jitter
Error decoding
Specification
25-way D-type, Female
1.544 - 54 Mbit/s
LVDS
Within G.823/G.824 limits.
None
DVB ASI Optical
Table B.12: DVB ASI Optical: M2/PDU/942[B]
Input
Connector type
Data rate range
Error decoding
Specification
SC type
0.53872 - 54 Mbit/s
None
DVB ASI Copper
Table B.13: DVB-ASI Copper: M2/PDU/942[B][C][D]
Input
Connector type
Input impedance
Data rate range
Error decoding
Specification
BNC, Female
75 W
0.53872 - 54 Mbit/s
None
The DVB ASI Copper input is byte-mode only for M2/PDU/942B.
It is byte-mode and single packet burst mode for M2/PDU/942C.
Page B-8 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
B.3.2 Satellite Receivers QPSK/8PSK
This table applies to M2/P8R/942[A] models
Table B.14: P8R Satellite Receiver Input Specification: QPSK/8PSK
Parameter
Safety status
Number of inputs
Isolation between inputs
Connector type
Input impedance
Return loss
Signal type
Tuning range
Frequency capture range
Tuning step
Receive spectrum sense
Input level per carrier (8PSK)
Input level per carrier (8PSK)
3 rd
order intercept point
FEC rates
Symbol rate range
Symbol-rate step
Symbol-rate lock range
Oscillator power at the L-band input
Image rejection ratio
Surge protection
Value
SELV
2
25 dB typical
4
F-type, female 75 W
75 W
> 7 dB, 950 < f < 2,150 MHz 5
EN 301 210 (8PSK) 6 , EN 300 421 (QPSK)
950 to 2,150 MHz
Programmable up to:
± 5 MHz, QPSK
± 2.5 MHz, 8PSK
100 kHz
Normal and inverted, automatic selection
-80 to –37 dBm (1.0
£ Rs < 3.75 MSymbol/s)
-72 to –31 dBm (3.75 £ Rs < 7.5 MSymbol/s)
-65 to –25 dBm (7.5 £ Rs £ 44.5 MSymbol/s)
-65 to –25 dBm (3.0 £ Rs < 20.0 MSymbol/s)
-55 to –25 dBm (20 £ Rs < 30.0 MSymbol/s)
+5 dBm typical at wanted carrier input power levels –25 dBm (Wideband – for signals outside ± 200 MHz of wanted carrier)
QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
8PSK: 5/6, 8/9
QPSK: 1.0 to 44.5 MSymbol/s
8PSK: FEC rate 5/6: 3.0 to 30.0 MSymbol/s
8PSK: FEC rate 8/9: 3.0 to 24.0 MSymbol/s (operates up to 28.125 MSymbol/s)
100 Symbol/s
± 100 ppm
< -55 dBm, 40 < f < 2050 MHz (active input)
27 dB min for a carrier power level of -25 dBm
30 dB min for a carrier power level of -65 dBm
(f c
+ 959 MHz (nominal))
4.5 kV typical
4
This specification relates to, a - the isolation across inputs (loop-through isolation) and, b – isolation from the non-selected to the selected input measured at the demodulator input.
5
6
Applies to the selected input. The non-selected input is reflective.
EN 301 210: Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing Structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital
Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-9
Technical Specification
B.3.3 Satellite Receivers QPSK/BPSK
This table applies to all M2/PSR/9xx models
Table B.15: PSR Satellite Receiver Input Specification: QPSK/BPSK
Parameter
Safety status
Number of inputs 7
Isolation between inputs
8
Connector type
Input impedance
Return loss
Signal type
11
Tuning range 12
Frequency capture range
Tuning step
Receive spectrum sense
Input carrier power level
Total L-band input power
3 rd order intercept point
Convolutional FEC rates
Symbol rate range
Symbol rate step
Symbol rate lock range
Oscillator power at the L-band input
Image rejection ratio
Surge protection
Value
SELV
2 or 4 (See Chapter 2, Section 2.6)
#1 - #2, #3 - #4: 25 dB typical
9
#1 - #3, #2 - #3, #1 - #4, #2 - #4: 80 dB min
(where inputs fitted)
F-type, female 75 W
75 W
> 7 dB, 950 < f < 2,150 MHz (active input)
10
QPSK per EN 300 421
950 to 2,150 MHz
Programmable up to ± 5 MHz
100 kHz
Normal and inverted (automatic selection)
-25 to –72 dBm (1.0 £ Rs < 5.0 MSymbol/s)
–25 to –65 dBm (5.0
£ Rs < 30.0 MSymbol/s)
–25 to –65 + 0.34 (Rs – 30.0) dBm (30.0 £ Rs < 44.5 MSymbol/s)
< -10 dBm
+5 dBm typical at wanted carrier input power levels –25 dBm
(Wideband – for signals outside ± 200 MHz of wanted carrier)
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
1.0 to 44.5 MSymbol/s
100 Symbol/s
± 120 ppm min
< -55 dBm, 40 < f < 2,150 MHz
(active input)
27 dB min for a carrier power level of -25 dBm
30 dB min for a carrier power level of -65 dBm
(f c
+ 959 MHz (nominal))
4.5 kV typical
7
Only the active input is powered.
8
Where high isolation between L-band inputs to the receiver is required, inputs 1-3, 2-3, 1-4 and 2-4 should be used.
9
This specification relates to, a - the isolation across inputs (loop-through isolation) and, b – isolation from the
non-selected to the selected input measured at the demodulator input.
10
11
12
Applies to the selected input. Non-selected inputs may be reflective.
EN 300 421: Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for 11/12 GHz satellite services.
The displayed frequency is either L-band or SHF dependent on the LNB frequency and the SHF carrier frequency set
in the satellite receiver input menu.
Page B-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
Table B.16: L-band Satellite Input — Eb/N
0
Ratio: QPSK, all M2/PSR models
Convolutional FEC Rate
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
Receive Eb/N
0
Ratio (dB min) in IF Loop for Correct MPEG-2
System Operation
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.4
Eb/N
0
ratio is referred to user bit-rate Ru188. See EN 300 421 specification. For more detailed specification information and advice on performance in specific applications, please contact TANDBERG Television
Customer Services.
Table B.17: L-band Satellite Input — Eb/N
0
Ratio: 8PSK/QPSK, all M2/PSR models
Modulation/FEC Rate
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 5/6
QPSK 7/8
8PSK 5/6
8PSK 8/9
Receive Eb/N
0
Ratio (dB min) in IF Loop for Correct MPEG-2
System Operation
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.4
8.9
9.4
Eb/N
0
ratio is referred to user bit-rate Ru188. See EN 300 421 and EN 301
210 specification. For more detailed specification information and advice on performance in specific applications, please contact TANDBERG Television
Customer Services.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-11
Technical Specification
B.3.4 LNB Power and Control
This section applies to M2/P8R/942[A] and all M2/PSR/9xx models.
The Alteia range of QPSK Satellite Receivers provides LNB power and control signals through the active RF input connector. The 22 kHz tone is turned ON and remains on when high-band is selected. LNB power and controls are enabled through the Satellite Input Menu (#4) Pages, see
Annex C, Menus.
Table B.18: LNB Power and Control
Parameter Specification
Voltage (V nominal)
M2/PSR/9XX
[A][B][C]
M2/P8R/942[A]
13
17
13
17
Current £ 350 mA
Software control TONE ON/OFF
Tone frequency
Tone amplitude
22 ± 2 kHz
ON: 0.6
± 0.2 Vp-p
OFF: £ 0.05 Vp-p
Boost Voltage (V typical)
0.5
1.0
0.8
0.8
Receiver Polarisation
13
linear vertical/circular right linear horizontal/circular left linear vertical/circular right linear horizontal/circular left
This is automatic and is triggered by the frequency range required.
B.3.5 Terrestrial Receivers
Models
This section applies to the M2/PTR/94x[A] models.
UHF Input Specification
Table B.19: Terrestrial Receiver UHF Input Specifications: M2/PTR/942 and M2/PTR/948[A]
Item
Modulation types
Guard intervals
Inner code rates
FFT size
Number of transmitted carriers
Active data carriers in each OFDM symbol
Signal format
Input frequency
Bit-rate
Input carrier power (P in
)
Noise figure
Oscillator power at input connector
Image rejection ratio
Specification
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
1/32 º 7ms, 1/16 º 14ms, 1/8 º 28ms, 1/4 º 56ms
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
2k
1705
1512
8k (M2/PTR/948[A] only)
6817
6048
EN 300 744
Channel 21 to Channel 68 (470 MHz - 862 MHz)
4.98 - 31.67 Mbit/s
Depends on mode and channel.
E.g. channel 21, 64QAM, rate 2/3: minimum: -79 dBm (typical) maximum: -25 dBm
7.5 dB (typical)
<-62 dBm, 510 <f <895 MHz
>50 dB for front end gain reduction < = 10 dB
13
Receive Polarisation: As specified in EN 300 784: Satellite Earth Station and Systems (SES); Television
Receive-only (TVRO) earth stations operating in the 11/12 GHz frequency bands.
Page B-12 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
Net Input Data Rates
The Terrestrial Receiver operates with useful bit-rates (Mbit/s) for all combinations of guard interval, constellation and code rate for non-hierarchical systems, as shown in Table B.20.
Table B.20: Terrestrial Receiver Useful Data Rates: M2/PTR/94x[A]
Modulation Code Rate
QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
Baseband Connector
Guard Interval
1/4 1/8
4,98
6,64
7,46
8,29
8,71
9,95
13,27
14,93
16,59
17,42
14,93
19,91
22,39
24,88
26,13
5,53
7,37
8,29
9,22
9,68
11,06
14,75
16,59
18,43
19,35
16,59
22,12
24,88
27,65
29,03
Table B.21: Terrestrial Receiver Baseband Connector: M2/PTR/94x[A]
1/16
5,85
7,81
8,78
9,76
10,25
11,71
15,61
17,56
19,52
20,49
17,56
23,42
26,35
29,27
30,74
Input
Connector type
Centre frequency
Signal bandwidth
Direction of spectrum
Specification
BNC, 50 W, Female
4.5714286 MHz
7.612 MHz
Normal
1/32
6,03
8,04
9,05
10,05
10,56
12,06
16,09
18,10
20,11
21,11
18,10
24,13
27,14
30,16
31,67
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-13
Technical Specification
B.3.6 Digital ENG Receivers
Models
This section applies to the M2/PTRE/94x[C][CVL] models.
IF Input Specification
Table B.22: Digital ENG Receiver IF Input Specifications: M2/PTRE/94x[C][CVL]
Item Specification
Modulation types
Guard intervals
Inner code rates
FFT size
Number of transmitted carriers
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
1
/
32
º 7ms,
1
/
16
º 14ms,
1
/
8
º 28ms,
1
/
4
º 56ms
1 /
2
, 2 /
3
, 3 /
4
, 5 /
6
, 7 /
8
2k
1705
Active data carriers in each OFDM symbol 1512
Signal format EN 300 744
Input frequency
Input impedance
Return loss
70 MHz
75 W
< 15 dB
Bit-rate
Input carrier power (P in
):
Noise figure
Oscillator power at input connector
Adjacent Channel Interference
4.98 - 31.67 Mbit/s
Depends on mode and channel.
E.g. 64QAM, rate 2 /
3
: minimum: -20 dBm (typical), maximum: 20 dBm
2.4 dB (typical)
<-65 dBm, 1 to 200 MHz
> 10 dB relative to wanted for sine wave at frequencies at least 4 MHz away from 70 MHz.
Net Input Data Rates
The Digital ENG Receiver operates with useful bit-rates (Mbit/s) for all combinations of guard interval, constellation and code rate for non-hierarchical systems, as shown in Table B.20.
B.3.7 Frame Sync Connector (Alteia plus Only)
Frame Sync is a purchasable option (M2/PRO/SYNC).
Table B.23: Frame Sync Connector (Alteia plus Only)
Item
Connector type
Connector designation
Connection Pin
Body
Impedance
Specification
BNC, Female
FRAME SYNC
Analogue Black and Burst Input
Ground/Chassis
High
NOTES…
1. Software versions 2.1 and 2.2: This connector is not used.
2. Alteia models – Connector used to provide an additional analogue video output.
Alteia plus models: Software version 2.3 and later – Connector used for Frame Sync input.
Page B-14 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
B.4 Output Specifications
B.4.1 Transport Stream Output
A high-speed synchronous parallel data output is provided for the partially decrypted MPEG-2 data stream.
Table B.24: DVB-SPI Parallel Transport Stream Output Connector
Input
Safety status
Connector designation
Interface signals
Data rate
Data levels
Timing
Specification
SELV
MPEG-2 SPI-TSO
CLOCK: Byte data transfer clock to accompany data.
DATA(7:0): Data bus.
PACKET SYNC: Packet start signal, high for one cycle of CLOCK on the first byte of the packet.
DATA_VALID High during valid Transport Stream content. Compliant with DVB-SPI specification.
GND: Ground.
Up to 10 MByte/s.
LVDS signal levels.
Compliant with DVB-PI specification of SPI timing.
NOTES…
Alteia plus Models Only
1. Decoder Models (M2/PDU/942B): If the transport stream bit-rate from the SPI output is less than
54 Mbit/s, the unit provides a DVB compliant output. Any ASI output is unaffected.
If the transport stream bit-rate is between 54 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s, the output is not DVB compliant. Any ASI output is unaffected.
2. All models except M2/PDU/942C Decoder: The ASI output is byte-mode only.
3. M2/PDU/942C Decoder: If the ASI output option card is used (see Chapter 5, Options) the output mode depends on the input mode. If the input mode is SPI, the ASI output is byte-mode. If the input is ASI, the ASI output is single packet burst mode.
4. Satellite Receiver Models: The transport stream output is as shown in Table B.9.
5. All models: if the transport stream bit-rate is greater than 80 Mbit/s the Director CA system is disabled.
B.4.2 Video Outputs
Analogue Composite Video
Table B.25: Analogue Video Output Connector
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Video standards
Composite video level
Composite video level adjustment
Specification
SELV
2 x BNC, female, 75 W. (1 if a B suffix model)
PAL-B, -G, -I, -M (PAL-M is fully supported on D variants only; It can be selected on B and C variants but performance is not guaranteed),
-N Combination, -N Normal or NTSC-M, with or without pedestal
(set in Video Menu, #6)
1 Vpk-pk in 75
W nominal
0.7 to 1.3 Vpk-pk
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-15
Technical Specification
Digital Video
Table B.26 applies to all M2/Pxx/94x Models.
Table B.26: Digital Video Output Connector
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Video standards
Video level
Jitter Performance, Nominal
(Tested according to SMPTE RP184 100%
Colour Bars)
Specification
SELV
BNC, female, 75 W.
ITU-R BT.656 digital output at 270 MHz
800 mV ± 10mV pk-pk in 75 W nominal
PXX / 942 / 0.7 UI
PXX / 942/A 0.3 UI
PXX / 942/B 0.2 – 0.26 UI locked to PCR 42
/ ‘ 0.7 UI Frame Synchronised
PXX / 942/C 0.2 – 0.26 UI
Video Test (Monitor) Connector
Table B.27: Video Test (Monitor) Connector
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Composite video level
Specification (See notes on Page B-15)
SELV
BNC, female, 75 W
1V pk-pk into 75
W nominal
NOTE…
Video performance characteristics are different to those measured at the rear panel connectors.
B.4.3 Audio Outputs
Analogue Audio
Four XLR audio connectors are provided for two stereo or dual-channel audio outputs.
Table B.28: Analogue Audio Output Connector
Item
Safety status
Output level
Nominal output impedance
Load impedance
Clipping level dBm
Output level
Compression layers
Sampling rates
Data rates
Specification
SELV
0 dBm nominal
50 W
³600 W balanced
0 to +18 (set via on-screen menus)
±3 dBm from the clipping level
MPEG-2 layers 1 and 2, Dolby Digital (AC-3)
32, 44 ×1, 48 kHz
All MPEG-2 rates
Page B-16 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
Digital Audio
Table B.29 applies to M2/Pxx/94x Models.
Two audio connectors are provided for two digital stereo or dual-channel audio outputs conveying Dolby Digital 5.1, Dolby Digital AC-3 or Linear
PCM.
Table B.29: Digital Audio Output Connector
Item
Safety status
Output format
Output level
Nominal output impedance
Load impedance
Specification
SELV
AES/EBU in IEC958 Analogue, Compressed, Professional or Consumer (selectable).
See Table C-19 on Page C-25 for further information.
5 Volts nominal, coded signal level –12 dB FS nominal.
50 W
110 W
Audio Monitor
Table B.30: Audio Monitor Connector
Item
Safety status
Output level
Specification
SELV
0 dBm nominal
NOTE…
Audio Monitor performance characteristics are different to those measured at the rear panel connectors.
Supported Audio Modes
Table B.31 shows the supported audio output modes.
Table B.31: Supported Audio Output Modes
Audio Mode
Single channel
Dual channel mono
Joint stereo (Intensity stereo)
Stereo
Description
A single channel is output to both XLR connectors.
Two mono signals are carried in the transport stream as a single PES - both are decoded and output on the appropriate connector. One mono source can be output to both connectors.
Stereo pair is coded taking advantage of the stereo nature of the channels.
Stereo pair is coded as two mono signals - the signals are output to the two XLR connectors.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-17
Technical Specification
B.4.4 Data Outputs
RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data
Table B.32: RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data Connector
Item
Safety status
Data-rates (bit/s)
Standards
Line length
Specification
SELV
1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19 200
EIA RS-232C / ITU-T BT. V.24/V.28
< 15 metres
RS-422 Synchronous (High-speed) Data
Table B.33: RS-422 Synchronous (High-speed) Data Connector
Item
Safety status
Data-rates (bit/s)
Specification
SELV
In integer multiples of 56 kbit/s and 64 kbit/s up to 2.048 Mbit/s
(Subject to the number and type of services in the multiplex)
NOTE…
High-speed RS-422 Synchronous data is available on suffix A Alteias (e.g. M2/PSR/942A) and Alteia
plus.
B.4.5 Auxiliary Relay Interface
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Output
Table B.34: Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Output
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Output impedance
Output voltage range
Specification
SELV
Female
10 k W ±1%
0 - 10 Volts into 10 k W ±1% termination when RF varies as in Table B.7
NOTE…
The AGC output is available on Receivers only.
Page B-18 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
Discrete Control and Summary Alarm Relays
Table B.35: Discrete Control and Summary Alarm Relays
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Current rating
Specification
SELV
Female
1 amp at 24 Vdc
B.4.6 Remote Control Connector (R CTRL RS-232/485)
Table B.36: Remote Control Connector
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Standard
Specification
SELV
9-way D-type, male
R CTRL RS-232/485
EIA RS-232C / RS-485
B.5 Environmental
B.5.1 Conditions
Table B.37: Environmental Conditions
Operational
Temperature
Humidity
Cooling requirements
Handling/movement
Storage/Transportation
Temperature
Humidity
B.5.2 Physical
Table B.38: Physical Parameters
0 °C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F) ambient with free airflow
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Convection cooling/free airflow
Fixed (non-mobile) use only
0 °C to +70°C (+32°F to +158°F)
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Parameter
Height
Width
Depth
Rack mounting standard
Weight
Performance
44 mm
432 mm (without rack fixing brackets)
486.8 mm (with rack fixing brackets)
433.5 mm (over connectors)
1U x 19 inches (1U º 44.45 mm)
4 kg (8.8 lbs) approximate
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-19
Technical Specification
B.6 Power Supply
This equipment is fitted with an auto-ranging power supply. It is suitable for supply voltages of 100-120 Vac -10% +6% or 220-240 Vac -10% +6% at 50/60 Hz nominal.
Table B.39: Power Supply Specifications
Item
Power distribution system
Connection to supply
Class of equipment
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Voltage selection
Rated current (max)
Input connector
Fuse rated voltage
Fuse type
Consumption
Power cable connector fuse
Specification
Type TN ONLY (EN 60950 para 1.2.12.1): Power distribution system having one point directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective earth conductors. This equipment must NOT be used with single-phase three-wire and PE, TT or IT Type Power distribution systems.
Pluggable Equipment Type A (EN 60950 para 1.2.5): Equipment that is intended for connection to the building power supply wiring via a non-industrial plug and socket-outlet or a non-industrial appliance coupler or both. Correct mains polarity must always be observed. Do not use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Class I Equipment (EN 60950 para 1.2.4): electric shock protection by basic insulation and protective earth.
100 – 120 / 220 – 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
Auto-ranging
1.0 A
CEE 22/IEC 320 3-pin male receptacle
250 Vac
T1.6A, H250 V, 5x20mm, IEC 127-1 and UL recognised.
75 W nominal
5 A
Page B-20 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Technical Specification
B.7 Compliance
14
B.7.1 Safety
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the requirements of the following:
EN 60950 European Safety of information technology equipment including business equipment.
IEC 950 International Safety of information technology equipment including business equipment.
In addition, the product has been designed to meet the following:
UL 1950
USA
Safety of information technology equipment including business equipment.
B.7.2 EMC
15
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the following:
EN 50082-1
16
European
EN55013
EN55013/A12
European
17
EN 55022 European
AS/NZS 3548
Australia/NZ
EN 61000-3-2
European
EN 61000-3-3
European
FCC
USA
Generic Immunity Standard
Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry environment.
Test: Limits of disturbance voltage at the antenna terminals. Table 2 applied only.
Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of broadcast receivers and associated equipment.
Emission Standard
Limits and methods of measurement of radio frequency interference characteristics of information technology equipment - Class A.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3
Limits; Section 2. Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current >16 A per phase).
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3.
Limits; Section 3. Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current £ 16
A.
Conducted and radiated emission limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to the Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) Title
47-Telecommunications, Part 15: Radio frequency devices, subpart B - Unintentional
Radiators.
14
15
16
17
The version of the standards shown is that applicable at the time of manufacture.
The EMC tests were performed with the Technical earth attached, and configured using recommended cables.
Both 1992 and 1997 versions.
Applies to PTR model only.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page B-21
Technical Specification
B.7.3 CE Marking
The CE mark is affixed to indicate compliance with the following directives:
89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
NOTE...
The CE mark was first affixed to this product in 1998.
B.7.4 C-Tick Mark
The C-Tick mark is affixed to denote compliance with the
Australian Radiocommunications (Compliance and Labelling –
Incidental Emissions) Notice made under s.182 of
Radiocommunications Act 1992.
NOTE...
The C-Tick mark was first affixed to this product in 1999.
Page B-22 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Annex C
C.
Menus
Contents
C.1 LCD Menu Groups ....................................................C-3
C.1.1 Using the Menus...........................................C-3
C.1.2 Menu Descriptions........................................C-3
C.2 LCD Front Panel Display Menu Tree ........................C-3
C.3 Menu/Page Lines ......................................................C-7
C.3.1 Fields and Lines............................................C-7
C.3.2 Line 1............................................................C-7
C.3.3 Line 2............................................................C-7
C.3.4 Line 3............................................................C-7
C.3.5 Terminology..................................................C-7
C.4 Status Menu (#1).......................................................C-8
C.4.1 Status Menu Pages ......................................C-8
C.4.2 Status Menu Configuration ...........................C-8
C.4.3 Director Status Message Page.....................C-8
C.5 Preset (Services) Menu (#2) .....................................C-9
C.6 Service Menu (#3)...................................................C-10
C.7 Input Menu (#4) for Various Models........................C-12
C.7.1 Locking to the Incoming Transport
Stream ........................................................C-12
C.7.2 Decoder Input Menu Pages........................C-12
C.7.3 Satellite Receiver Input Menu Pages..........C-13
C.7.4 Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu Pages (to version 2.5.4)..............................................C-14
C.7.5 Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu Pages
(version 2.8.3 on)........................................C-16
C.7.6 Digital ENG Input Menu Pages...................C-18
C.8 Alarm Menu (#5) for Various Models ......................C-19
C.8.1 Decoder Alarm Menu Pages.......................C-19
C.8.2 Satellite Receiver Alarm Menu Pages ........C-20
C.8.3 Terrestrial and Digital ENG Receiver
Alarm Menu Pages..................................... C-21
C.9 Video Menu (#6)..................................................... C-22
C.9.1 General Menus........................................... C-22
C.9.2 Additional Menus for Alteia plus Models .... C-23
C.10 Subtitle/VBI Menu (#7) ........................................... C-24
C.10.1 Menu #7 (Software Versions 2.1 and 2.2).. C-24
C.10.2 Menu #7 (Software Version 2.4 and
Later).......................................................... C-25
C.11 Audio 1 Menu (#8).................................................. C-28
C.12 Audio 2 Menu (#9).................................................. C-29
C.13 Conditional Access Menu (#10).............................. C-29
C.13.1 Introduction ................................................ C-29
C.13.2 Menu #10 (With No Conditional Access).... C-29
C.13.3 Menu #10 (VideoGuard)............................. C-30
C.13.4 Menu #10 (RAS) ........................................ C-33
C.13.5 Menu #10 (BISS)........................................ C-34
C.14 Data Menu (#11)..................................................... C-34
C.15 Timers Menu (#12) ................................................. C-35
C.16 System Menu (#13) ................................................ C-35
C.16.1 Introduction ................................................ C-35
C.16.2 Using the SMALL RBUFF MODE (Menu
#13, Page 22)............................................. C-37
When to Disable the SMALL RBUFF
MODE ........................................................ C-37
When to Enable the SMALL RBUFF
MODE ........................................................ C-37
C.16.3 Director System.......................................... C-38
Using the PIN Number ............................... C-38
Setting the PIN Number ............................. C-38
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-1
Menus
Engineering Menu (#14) .................................................. C-39
List of Figures
Figure C.1: Conventions Used in the Menu Tree Diagrams..........C-3
Figure C.2: Pages under Menus #1 to #7 (excluding #4) ..............C-4
Figure C.3: Pages under Menus #8 to #14....................................C-5
Figure C.4: Pages under Menu #4 ................................................C-6
Figure C.5: Page Lines and Fields ................................................C-7
Figure C.6: Building Up the VBI Output Data ..............................C-27
Figure C.7: Using the PIN Number (Director Systems)...............C-38
Figure C.8: Setting the PIN Number (Director Systems).............C-38
List of Tables
Table C.1: Status Menu (#1) Pages ..............................................C-8
Table C.2: Menu (#1) Configuration Pages ...................................C-8
Table C.3: Director Status Menu (#1) Pages.................................C-9
Table C.4: Preset Menu (#2) Pages ..............................................C-9
Table C.5: Service Menu (#3) Pages ..........................................C-10
Table C.6: Decoder Input Menu (#4) Pages................................C-12
Table C.7: Satellite Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages .................C-13
Table C.8: Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages (to version 2.5.4) .............................................................C-14
Table C.9: Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages
(version 2.83 on) ........................................................C-16
Table C.10: Digital ENG Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages, ........C-18
Table C.11: Decoder Alarm Menu (#5) Pages ............................C-19
Table C.12: Satellite Receiver Alarm Menu (#5) Pages..............C-20
Table C.13: Terrestrial Alarm Menu (#5) Pages..........................C-21
Table C.14: Video Menu (#6) Pages ...........................................C-22
Table C.15: Video Menu (#6) Pages for Alteia plus Models........C-23
Table C.16: Video Test Patterns (Menu #6 Page 12)..................C-23
Table C.17: Subtitle/VBI Menu (#7) Pages (Software Versions
2.1 and 2.2) ................................................................C-24
Table C.18: Subtitle/VBI Menu (#7) Pages (Software Version
2.4 and later) ..............................................................C-25
Table C.19: Audio 1 Menu (#8) Pages ........................................C-28
Table C.20: Audio Output Options...............................................C-28
Table C.21: AC-3 Down-mixing ...................................................C-28
Table C.22: Menu #10 Pages with no Conditional Access
Installed......................................................................C-29
Table C.23: VideoGuard Conditional Access menu (#10)
Pages .........................................................................C-30
Table C.24: Conditional Access Status Messages (Menu #10,
Page 1).......................................................................C-31
Table C.25: Conditional Access System Messages (Menu
#10, Page 2)...............................................................C-31
Table C.26: Download Status - Percentage (XXX)......................C-32
Table C.27: Download Status - Status (YY) ................................C-32
Table C.28: Download Status – Error Count (CCC) ....................C-32
Table C.29: Download Status – Common Download Errors
(TT-NN) ......................................................................C-32
Table C.30: Download Status – Error Type (TT).........................C-32
Table C.31: Download Status – Error Number (NN)....................C-33
Table C.32: Additional RAS Menu associated with Menu #10 ....C-33
Table C.33: Additional BISS Menu Pages Associated with
Menu #10 ...................................................................C-34
Table C.34: Data Menu (#11) Pages...........................................C-34
Table C.35: Timers Menu (#12) Pages .......................................C-35
Table C.36: System Menu (#13) Pages ......................................C-35
Table C.37: Engineering Menu (#14) Pages ...............................C-39
Page C-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
C.1 LCD Menu Groups
C.1.1 Using the Menus
Detailed descriptions of the use of menus are given in Chapter 3,
Operating the Equipment Locally or Chapter 6, Preventive Maintenance
and Fault-finding.
C.1.2 Menu Descriptions
This annex describes the front panel LCD Menus.
When the unit is first powered up, it progresses through a series of start-up pages on the LCD display.
Menus
NOTES...
1. If the EDIT button is kept pressed as the unit powers up, it will enter a mode that allows the front panel LEDs and LCD display to be tested. This is explained in Chapter 6, Preventive
Maintenance and Fault-finding.
2. Director system (over-air) only: If the RIGHT button is kept pressed as the unit powers up, the unit will run the inactive code. Note that, from this point, this becomes the active code.
There are 14 Menu groups and associated sub-menu pages. Menus are selected using the MENU control and sub-menu pages by the SELECT control.
If the front panel controls or pushbuttons are not used for about three minutes, the display reverts to Menu #1, Page 1 (Status: Service) and any edits that have not been saved are lost.
C.2 LCD Front Panel Display Menu Tree
Figure C.2 and Figure C.3 illustrate the menu tree accessed from the front panel for the Alteia range of products. The following conventions are used to aid understanding:
Items contained in a box allow access to further information, editable or selectable items.
1. Select
2. Audio 1
3. Audio 2
4. DVB Subtitles
5. Teletext / Async / Sync
6. Network Name
7. Service Provider
EDIT
SELECT
Press the EDIT button to gain access to the further items. The EDIT button LED is lit.
Certain conditions may prevail to enable the action – these are described in an annotation.
Use the SELECT control to scroll through the list of items.
Displays [Service Name] (or
EMPTY) stored in preset nn
(Section C.x.x)
A Process Box indicates the nature of the displayed items.
Call outs are used to highlight important information contained on an indicated page.
SAVE
[Service Name] in slot nn becomes the current service
Press the SAVE button to enable the displayed item or press EDIT again to return to the source menu item without any changes. The
EDIT button LED extinguishes.
A Termination Box indicates the nature of the enabled item. If not present, then
Process Box gives relevant information.
Figure C.1: Conventions Used in the Menu Tree Diagrams
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-3
Menus
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MENU CONTROL -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#1 STATUS
(Paragraph C.4.1)
#2 PRESET
(Section C.5)
#3 SERVICE
(Section C.6)
#4 INPUT
(Section C.7)
#5 ALARM
(Section C.8)
#6 VIDEO
(Section C.9)
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
(Section C.10)
1. Select
2. Store
3. Default
4. Clear
Power Up Service
(Factory default:
Last Service)
EDIT
SELECT
Action depends on the selected page.
SAVE
1. Select from nnn
2. Audio 1
3. Audio 2
4. DVB Subtitles
5. Teletext / Async / Sync
6. Network Name
7. Service Provider
EDIT
SELECT
Scrolls through the data streams associated with the selected service.
SAVE
Operator chosen
Menu Pages Page 1 is the default display
(Factory default:
Shows current service).
The selected service and chosen data streams are decoded.
C
1. Menu x, Page y
2. Menu x, Page y
3. Menu x, Page y
4. Menu x, Page y
5. Menu x, Page y
Director Models
Only
over-air message
(Section C.4.3)
6. Status
Page 6 displays the last message received by the
Director control system. It is immediately displayed if an Over-Air message is received.
EDIT
SELECT
Scrolls through all the
Menu pages.
(Paragraph C.4.2)
SAVE
Assigns the currently displayed Menu Page to the chosen page in
Menu #1.
Figure C.2: Pages under Menus #1 to #7 (excluding #4)
M2/PDU/942
Decoder
(
Section
C.8.1)
1. Page
2. Input / Relay / Mask
3. Video / Relay / Mask
4. VBI / Relay / Mask
5. Audio 1 / Relay / Mask
6. Audio 2 / Relay / Mask
7. Async / Relay / Mask
8. Sync / Relay / Mask
9. CA / Relay / Mask
10. Temperature
11. Fan Status
12. User Mask Alarm
M2/PSR/9xx and
M2/P8R/942
Satellite Receivers
(
Section
C.8.2)
1. Page
2. Input / Relay / Mask
3. BER / Relay / Mask
4. Sig Level / Relay / Mask
5. Video / Relay / Mask
6. VBI / Relay / Mask
7. Audio 1 / Relay / Mask
8. Audio 2 / Relay / Mask
9. Async / Relay / Mask
10. Sync / Relay / Mask
11. CA / Relay / Mask
12. LNB Volt / Relay / Mask
13. Temperature
14. Fan Status
15. User Alarm Mask
M2/PTR[E]/94x
Terrestrial and Digital
ENG Receivers
(
Section
C.8.3)
1. Page
2. Input / Relay / Mask
3. P Vit / Relay / Mask
4. Video / Relay / Mask
5. VBI / Relay / Mask
6. Audio 1 / Relay / Mask
7. Audio 2 / Relay / Mask
8. Async / Relay / Mask
9. Sync / Relay / Mask
10. CA / Relay / Mask
11. PMT / Relay / Mask
12. Post RS Errs / Relay / Mask
13. TPS / Relay / Mask
14. Temperature
15. Time Sync
16. User Mask Alarm
A
B
Page C-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
A
B
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MENU CONTROL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#8 AUDIO 1
(Section C.11)
#9 AUDIO 2
(Section C.12)
#10 CA
(Section C.13)
#11 DATA
(Section C.14)
#12 TIMERS
(Section C.15)
#13 SYSTEM
(Section C.16)
Menus
RIGHT
MENU
1. Time
2. Time Zone
1. Language / Dolby Dig
2. Output
3. Default Language
4. Routing
5. Sys Clipping Level
6. Level
7. AC3 Downmixing Mode
(option)
1. Async
2. Sync
3. TSO
4. ASI Optical
No CA
1. Language / Dolby Dig
2. Output
3. Default Language
4. Routing
5. Sys Clipping Level
6. Level
7. AC3 Downmixing Mode
(option)
Software Versions
2.1 and 2.2
(Section C.10.1)
1. Default Language
2. VITS Insertion
3. VPS Present
(Not supported)
4. WSS Present
(Not supported)
5. CC/VChip
6. AMOL 1
(Not supported)
7. AMOL 2
(Not supported)
1. Service Status
2. No CA Installed
VideoGuard CA, RAS and BISS
(Section C.13)
1. Service Status
2. Status
3. CAS ID
4. Vguard Customer ID
(ver 2.2
®)
5. CA Code Version
6. CA Boot Code Version
7. Model Number
8. Hardware Type
9. Manufacturer Number
10. Download Status
11. Med Priority Stream
(ver 2.3
®)
12. Low Priority Stream
(ver 2.3
®)
13. RAS Mode/DSNG Key
14. BISS Mode/Key
(ver 2.6
®)
15. BISS-E Active ID
(ver 2.6
®)
Software Version 2.3
and later
(Section C.10.2)
1. Line/Input/Output
(Enhanced Models only)
2. Teletext
(Enhanced Models only)
3. VITS Insertion
4. VITC Insertion
(Enhanced Models only)
5. GCR Insertion
(Enhanced Models only)
6. CC/VChip
7. 525 Reinsertion
(Enhanced Models only)
8. 625 Reinsertion
(Enhanced Models only)
9. Default Subtitles
10. Subtitles
EDIT
SELECT
Scrolls through the
VBI line numbers to view the contents of the incoming and outgoing data.
1. Resolution
2. Mode / Line Standard
3. PEL Aspect Ratio
4. Frame Rate
5. 625 Standard
6. 525 Standard
7. Fail Mode
8. Aspect Ratio
9. Level
10. EDH
(Enhanced Models only)
11. Embedded Audio
(Enhanced Models only)
12. Test Pattern
(Enhanced Models only)
13. Frame Sync
(Enhanced Models only)
14. Frame Sync 625
(Enhanced Models only)
15. Frame Sync 525
(Enhanced Models only)
ü
ý Only available if Frame Sync
þ Option is purchased.
Figure C.3: Pages under Menus #8 to #14
1. Control mode
2. Remote Address
3. Remote Interface
4. LCD Contrast
5. Self Test Report
6. Model
7. Model Options
8. Demux Part Number
9. Demux Serial Number
10. Demux App Code Ver
11. Demux Core Code Ver
12. Demux Drv Code Ver
13. Demux Diag Code Ver
14. Output Part Number
15. U/P Part Number
16. U/P Code Version
17. I/P Part Version
18. I/P Code Version
19. Restore System
20. Reset Lockout PIN
21. Small RBUFF Mode
22. 525 Video Start
Director Models
Only
(
Local Lockout
Section
C.16.3)
1. Control Mode
2. Set PIN
3. Remote Address
4. Remote Interface
5. LCD Contrast
6. Self Test Report
7. Model
8. Model Options
9. Demux Part Number
10. Demux Serial Number
11. Demux App Code Ver
12. Demux Core Code Ver
13. Demux Drv Code Ver
14. Demux Diag Code Ver
15. Output Part Number
16. U/P Part Number
17. U/P Code Version
18. I/P Part Version
19. I/P Code Version
20. Restore System
21. Reset Lockout PIN
22. Small RBUFF Mode
23. 525 Video Start
#14 ENGINEERING
(Paragraph C.17)
1. Service ID
2. Transport Stream ID
3. Original Network ID
4. Network ID
5. Video PID
6. Audio 1 PID
7. Audio 2 PID
8. PCR PID
9. Async PID
10. Sync PID
11. Teletext PID
12. EMM PID
Demux App Code is the software version shown on the cover of this manual.
Pages 12 and 13 are not included in software version
2.3 and later. As a result, the remaining page numbering will be lower by 2
Demux App Code is the software version shown on the cover of this manual.
Pages 13 and 14 are not included in software version
2.3 and later. As a result, the remaining page numbering will be lower by
2
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-5
Menus
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MENU CONTROL -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
M2/PSR/9xx and
M2/P8R/942
Satellite Receivers
(
Section
C.7.3)
1. BER
2. Level
3. RF Input
4. KU/L Band Frequency
5. FEC / Sym Rate
6. Pol / Mode
7. LNB Type / LNB LO Freq
8. LO FRQ 2 / SW OVR Freq
9. LNB DC Output
10. Limits BER / Level
11. Search Range
M2/PDU/942
Decoder
(
Section
C.7.2)
1. Status
2. Source
M2/PTR/942, 948 Terrestrial
Receiver (to version 2.5.4)
(
Section
C.7.4)
1. Post Viterbi
2. UHF Channel
3. Guard Interval
4. OFDM Carrier Mode
5. Channel Space
6. Modulation
7. FEC Rate
8. Signal Degradation
9. Post RS Errors
10. Hierarchy Mode
11. Hierarchy Stream
12. Input Selection
13. Limits BER
M2/PTRE/94x
Digital ENG Receiver
(
Section
C.7.6)
1. Post Viterbi
2. UHF Channel (Disabled)
3. Guard Interval
4. OFDM Carrier Mode
5. Channel Space
6. Modulation
7. FEC Rate
8. Signal Degradation
9. Post RS Errors
10. Hierarchy Mode
11. Hierarchy Stream
12. Input Selection
13. Limits BER
Figure C.4: Pages under Menu #4
OR
LNB DC Output
(Factory default:
Disabled)
M2/PTR/948 Terrestrial
Receiver (version 2.8.3 on)
(
Section C.7.5
)
1. Post Viterbi
2. Spectrum Inversion
3. Guard Interval
4. OFDM Carrier Mode
5. Channel Space
6. Modulation
7. FEC Rate
8. Signal Degradation
9. Post RS Errors
10. Hierarchy Mode
11. Hierarchy Stream
12. Input Selection
13. Limits BER
14. UHF Frequency
15. Auto Mode
16. MER
Page C-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.3 Menu/Page Lines
C.3.1 Fields and Lines
Figure C.5 has a number of fields on three lines that are used to display which parameters are set. The Sections in this Annex describes the set of menus and their associated pages.
Menu Number and Name (on line 1)
Active Page Number
(e.g. 1 of 6)
Number of Pages in the Current Menu
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Icon Showing Available Page Direction.
(A Left direction icon appears to the left of the active page number, when a page other than number one is selected)
Figure C.5: Page Lines and Fields
C.3.2 Line 1
This is a non-editable line that, on the left-hand side, displays the menu group number and name. The right-hand side displays the number of the displayed sub-menu and the total number of submenus in the group in the form xx/nn.
The left (3) and right (4) icons indicate the presence of pages beyond the current display.
Line 1 may contain a status message such as LOCK, FAIL or OK.
C.3.3 Line 2
Line 2 contains non-editable item headings or text.
C.3.4 Line 3
Line 3 contains editable items or the non-editable balance of any message string that has wrapped over from line 2 in the case of a Director message.
C.3.5 Terminology
The tables in the remainder of this Annex are annotated (at the Menu Page number) with the following terms:
·
Selectable. This indicates that there are items on that page, having items that can be chosen from a presented list.
·
Editable. This indicates that there are items on that page, which have values that are entered directly by the operator.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-7
Menus
C.4 Status Menu (#1)
C.4.1 Status Menu Pages
This is the primary menu group for the Alteia. Any five of the Alteia’s menu pages can be displayed in any order as required. Alteia reverts to Menu #1 page 1 when the front panel controls have not been used for approximately three minutes.
The factory defaults are that page 1 displays the current service and the other pages are blank.
Table C.1: Status Menu (#1) Pages
Page
1 selectable n selectable
5 selectable
Display
#1 STATUS
SERVICE
MOVIES ONE
#1 STATUS
1/5 4
Description
Factory default: this page displays the current service. However, it can be reconfigured to display any menu page.
3n/54 Factory default: pages 2 to 5 are blank. They can be configured to display any menu page.
[BLANK]
#1 STATUS 35/5
[BLANK]
Each of the five pages can be can be configured to display any Menu page.
C.4.2 Status Menu Configuration
Pressing the EDIT button and using the SELECT control allows access to all the displayable Menu items.
Table C.2: Menu (#1) Configuration Pages
Page
selectable
Display
#1 STATUS – TIMERS 1/6 4
TIME ZONE
081 GMT+0000
Description
This is an example of a page displayed (when in page 1 of Menu #1) after pressing the EDIT button and rotating the SELECT control to scroll through the complete set of menu pages.
The viewed menu is shown between STATUS and 1/6 (e.g. TIMERS).
The number in the lower left hand corner is the page reference while in this mode
C.4.3 Director Status Message Page
If the unit is under Over-air control, a further page is added to the Status
Menu (shown overleaf in Table C.3). This page gives a maximum of 6 pages to Menu #1 and displays the last received Director message.
In over-air mode, the page is automatically displayed when a new information message is received. It remains until either the message is cancelled, or a new menu or page is displayed locally.
When cancelled, the Menu display reverts to Page 1.
Page C-8 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page
6
Menus
Table C.3: Director Status Menu (#1) Pages
Display
#1 STATUS MESSAGE
THIS IS A 40 CHARACTER
DIRECTOR MESSAGE
36/6
Description
The last page contains the last received non-editable message from the current service provider. If the unit is in Remote control, there is an indication that a new message is available.
Restrictions
Over-air control
(Director) models only
C.5 Preset (Services) Menu (#2)
This group allows up to 20 (00 to 19) services to be stored as presets.
Selecting a Service via the Preset menu automatically reconfigures the
Alteia. It also allows the power-up default (Menu #2, page 3) to be set.
Where a choice exists, each preset can have a selected language, network name and service provider associated with it.
NOTES...
1. A preset can only be stored if the service is currently being decoded.
2. Preset “– “ is below entry “00” in the list.
Page
1 selectable
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
Table C.4: Preset Menu (#2) Pages
Display
#2 PRESET 1/4 4
SELECT
18 [service name]
#2 PRESET 32/44
STORE [service name] IN
17 [EMPTY]
#2 PRESET 33/44
DEFAULT
21 [service name]
#2 PRESET
34/4
CLEAR
17 [service name]
Description
Provides a list of stored presets. Press EDIT and use SELECT to scroll through the list, and
SAVE to select a service.
·
If a service is stored, the preset number and the Service Name are displayed.
·
If the current Service is not a preset, the preset number is set to - - and the current Service
Name is displayed.
·
If a preset does not contain a stored service, the service name displays EMPTY.
·
If no service is being decoded, the preset number is not shown and the service name displays NO SERVICE RUNNING.
·
If there is no input lock, the preset number is not shown and the service name displays
INPUT NOT LOCKED.
·
If the input is locked but there is no SI, the preset number is not shown and the service name displays NO SERVICE INFO.
·
If the incoming transport stream is MPEG-2-only, the service number is shown in the format
SERVICE ID nnnn
This page allows the currently active Service [service name] and associated parameters to be stored as a preset (the service name is truncated to 15 characters). Press EDIT and use
LEFT/RIGHT/SELECT to select the preset number, and SAVE to store the service.
·
If no service is stored, the service name displays EMPTY.
·
If no service is being decoded, the service name displays NOTHING TO STORE.
Specifies the default power-up service. Empty presets are not selectable in EDIT mode.
·
If no service is stored, the service name displays EMPTY.
·
If LAST VALID SVC (factory default) is selected, the unit powers up to the Service being decoded at power-down.
Used to clear filled presets. Scroll through the list, stopping at the Service to be terminated as a preset. Press SAVE while the cursor is still within the Service name or associated number. Press
SAVE button to CONFIRM. Rotate the MENU or SELECT control to abort the process.
·
If no presets, the service name displays SLOTS ALL CLEARED.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-9
Menus
C.6 Service Menu (#3)
This menu group allows access to the currently available services. This group provides a summary of the data streams associated with the decoded service. In the case of multiple streams of the same component type, each stream can be selected independently.
After making a selection (in EDIT mode using page 1), and selecting the required component data streams (using the other pages), pressing SAVE makes it the current service. The audio, DVB Subtitles, Teletext
1
and data
2 modules will decode according to the default parameters set in other pages.
CAUTION…
The Edit mode can only be entered if there are services available.
Page
1 selectable
2 selectable
3 selectable
Table C.5: Service Menu (#3) Pages
Display
#3 SERVICE
SELECT FROM nnn
[service name]
#3 SERVICE
AUDIO 1
ENGLISH
1/7
4
32/74
DOLBY DIG
1FF0
#3 SERVICE
AUDIO 2
GERMAN FINNISH
33/74
Description
This is the main page and is used to list the currently available Services.
·
If no service is selected, the service name displays NO SERVICE RUNNING.
·
If there is no input lock, the service name displays INPUT NOT LOCKED.
·
If no services are available, the service name displays NO SERVICE INFO.
·
If the incoming transport stream is MPEG-2-only, the service number is shown in the format SERVICE ID nnnn
When entering this page, the languages displayed are those currently being decoded by channel 1. Annex E lists the available languages. This page sets the Audio channel 1 language and output format. In the example, the left and right channels are in English and coded to Dolby Digital AC-3. The Audio stream PID is displayed.
·
If no audio streams are available, the language displays NOT RUNNING.
·
If the stream is Dolby digital and is enabled, the language displays DOLBY DIG.
·
If the stream is Dolby digital and is not enabled, the language does not form part of the list.
·
If the Alteia model has a B suffix (e.g. M2/PSR/942B) and the audio is encoded as
Linear audio, the language displays LINEAR.
·
If the input is not locked, the language displays INPUT NOT LOCKED.
·
If the input is locked but no service is selected, the language displays NO SERVICE
RUNNING.
When entering this page, the languages displayed are those currently being decoded by channel 2. Annex E lists the available languages. This page sets the Audio channel 2 language and output format. In the example, the left channel is in German and the right is in Finnish.
·
If no audio streams are available, the language displays NOT RUNNING.
·
If the stream is Dolby digital and is enabled, the language displays DOLBY DIG.
·
If the stream is Dolby digital and is not enabled, the language does not form part of the list.
·
If the Alteia model has a B suffix (e.g. M2/PSR/942B) and the audio is encoded as
Linear audio, the language displays LINEAR.
·
If the input is not locked, the language displays INPUT NOT LOCKED.
·
If the input is locked but no service is selected, the language displays NO SERVICE
RUNNING.
1
Teletext is only available on models with suffix B, e.g. M2/PSR/942B.
2
Synchronous, high-speed, data is only available on models with suffixes A or B, e.g. M2/PSR/942A.
Page C-10 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
Page
4 selectable
(Software version 2.3 and later)
5 selectable
6
7
Display
#3 SERVICE
DVB SUBTITLES
34/74
ENGLISH NORMAL
#3 SERVICE 35/74
TELETEXT ASYNC SYNC
3 NONE NONE
#3 SERVICE
NETWORK NAME
[network name]
36/74
#3 SERVICE
SERVICE PROVIDER
[service provider name]
37/7
Description
DVB Subtitling can be enabled and the language specified using this page. On entering the page, the language is that which is currently being displayed on the video. Annex E lists all the available languages. The subtitle language and type are treated as a single parameter.
·
If available, displays the language for the currently received subtitle stream. It can take any value listed in Annex E.
·
The subtitles can be turned ON or OFF as required.
·
If no subtitle streams are available, the subtitle language displays NONE AVAILABLE.
·
The subtitle type can be any of the following:
NORMAL – normal subtitles suitable for any aspect ratio.
NORMAL 4/3 – normal subtitles for 4/3 aspect ratio displays.
NORMAL 16/9 – normal subtitles for 16/9 aspect ratio displays.
NORMAL 2.21/1 – normal subtitles for 2.21 aspect ratio displays.
H OF H – hard of hearing subtitles suitable for any aspect ratio displays.
H OF H 4/3 – hard of hearing subtitles for 4/3 aspect ratio displays.
H OF H 16/9 – hard of hearing subtitles for 16/9 aspect ratio displays
H OF H 2.21/1 – hard of hearing subtitles for 2.21/1 aspect ratio displays
The list of Teletext 3 services can be scrolled through and a choice made. The choices are:
NONE (available) or n (stream choice). The asynchronous and/or synchronous 4 data associated with a Service can be enabled. If any streams fail, - - - is displayed.
·
If multiple streams are available (indicated by numbers under a stream heading), choose the required stream using this page.
·
If no streams are available, NONE is displayed.
Actual network name truncated to 15 characters.
·
If no input lock, [network name] displays INPUT NOT LOCKED.
·
If input locked but no SI received, [network name] displays NO SERVICE INFO.
Actual service provider name truncated to 15 characters.
·
If no input lock, [service provider name] displays INPUT NOT LOCKED.
·
If input locked but no SI received, [service provider name] displays NO SERVICE
INFO.
·
If the input is locked but no service is selected, [service provider name] displays NO
SERVICE RUNNING
When SAVE is pressed, the currently selected Service becomes the current
Service.
Audio channel 1 is set to decode the language which best matches the preferences set up in menu #8. If no match can be found, the audio language is set to the first audio stream found in the service descriptor.
Audio channel 2 is set to the language which best matches the preferences defined in Menu #9. Decoding is as for Audio 1.
If a DVB Subtitle stream (page 4) is found, the Alteia is set decode the language which best matches the one selected in the SUBTITLES/VBI
Menu (#7). If no match is found, the subtitle language is set to the first language found in the service descriptor.
If Teletext streams are found then the first one to appear in the PMT is decoded and reinserted into the video output.
If asynchronous data streams are found then the first one to appear in the
PMT is decoded.
If synchronous data streams are found then the first one to appear in the
PMT is decoded.
3
4
Teletext is only available on models with suffix B, e.g. M2/PSR/942B.
Synchronous, high-speed, data is only available on models with suffixes A or B, e.g. M2/PSR/942A.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-11
Menus
C.7 Input Menu (#4) for Various Models
C.7.1 Locking to the Incoming Transport Stream
When the unit locks to the incoming transport stream, the LOCK LED on the front panel is lit (GREEN). When the unit is not locked to the incoming stream, the LED is RED.
If the incoming transport stream only has one service, the unit will automatically select it. If the stream carries more than one service, the operator must choose the required service using the Service menu.
C.7.2 Decoder Input Menu Pages
Table C.6 applies to models M2/PDU/942[B][C][D]
This menu has pages that allow the lock status to be displayed and the input source to be chosen.
Table C.6: Decoder Input Menu (#4) Pages
Page
1
2 selectable
Display
#4 INPUT
STATUS
1/2
LOCKED TO 188 PACKET
4
#4 INPUT
SOURCE
AUTO
32/2
Description
This page displays the Lock status.
This page allows the Decoder source to be chosen
Options
LOCKED TO 188 PACKET
LOCKED TO 204 PACKET
INPUT NOT LOCKED
M2/PDU/942[B]:
SPI (Synchronous Par. Interface)
ASI-C (Async Ser. Interface – copper)
ASI-F (Async Ser. Interface - fibre)
AUTO (ASI-F ® ASI-C ® SPI)
M2/PDU/942C:
SPI (Synchronous Par. Interface)
ASI-C (Async Ser. Interface – copper)
AUTO (ASI-C(1) ® ASI-C(2) ® SPI)
The inputs to the Decoder could be fully wired and each input active. The required SOURCE can be chosen using page 2.
Page C-12 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.7.3 Satellite Receiver Input Menu Pages
This section applies to M2/PSR/932[C] and all M2/P8R/942 and
M2/PSR/942 models. Any differences between models are highlighted in the Options column. Table 1.4 in Chapter 1, details the number of inputs for the various models.
Table C.7: Satellite Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages
Page
1
2
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
7 selectable
8 selectable
9 selectable
10 editable
11 editable
Display
#4 INPUT
BER n.n E - nn
1/11
4
#4 INPUT 1 32/114
LEVEL L- - - - OK- - - - H
155 T
#4 INPUT 1
RF INPUT
NO 1
33/114
#4 INPUT 1 34/114
KU BAND FREQUENCY
11410.0 MHz
#4 INPUT 1 35/114
Description
This page dynamically displays the Bit Error
Ratio (BER) at the receiver input.
Options
INPUT NOT LOCKED
Display BER value
This page dynamically displays the input signal level. The three-digit number under LEVEL is the
AGC level from the demodulator.
The display immediately to the right of LEVEL is a scale representation of the AGC value.
The RF input is chosen using this menu. The heading (INPUT n) in all menus in the group changes to reflect the input number.
The parameter on this page is determined by the frequency range entered in page 7. The frequency bands appear in the options column.
OUT OF RANGE is displayed for an invalid entry.
Set the Forward Error Correction (FEC) and
Symbol rate using this page.
Minimum increment is 100 Sym/s.
Keep the signal within the displayed band by adjusting the input.
M2/PSR/942[A][B], M2/PSR/932C: 1, 2, 3, 4.
M2/PSR/932: M2/P8R/942: 1, 2.
C BAND (LNB LO: 5000 - 6000 MHz)
KU BAND (LNB LO: 9000 - 11 500 MHz)
L BAND (LNB LO º NONE)
FREQUENCY (LO frequency none of above)
OUT OF RANGE (User enters frequency in the range 950 MHz to 2150 MHz)
FEC rates —
M2/PSR/9xx: ½, 2 /
3
, ¾,
5
/
6
, 6 /
7
, 7 /
8
.
M2/P8R/9xx:
5
/
6
,
8
/
9
.
#4 INPUT 1
POL
36/114
MOD
HORIZONTAL QPSK
#4 INPUT 1 37/114
LNB TYPE LNB LO FREQ
NORMAL 10000 MHz
#4 INPUT 1 38/114
LO FRQ 2 SW OVR FREQ
10000 MHz 10000.0 MHz
Use this page to set the antenna polarisation and modulation mode. When first displayed, the page displays the current settings of the modulation mode being used.
Set the LNB type in this page. Minimum LNB LO
FREQ increment is 1 MHz.
If the LNB type set in page 7 is not DUAL, the
LO frequency and switchover point are set to dashes.
Minimum LO FRQ2 increment is 100 kHz.
Minimum SW OVR FREQ increment is 100 kHz.
MODE —
M2/PSR/9xx: BPSK, QPSK.
M2/P8R/9xx: BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK
POL — HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL.
LNB TYPE —
NORMAL, DUAL, NONE.
LNB LO FREQ —
(LNB freq) MHz (LNB
º NORMAL)
(LNB lower freq) MHz (LNB º DUAL)
- - - - - - (LNB type º NONE).
LO FREQ 2 —
(LNB upper freq) MHz (LNB º DUAL)
- - - - - - (LNB type
º NORMAL/NONE).
SW OVR FREQ — xxxxx MHz (switchover frequency)
- - - - - - (LNB type º NORMAL/NONE).
DISABLED (factory default)
ENABLED
BOOST
#4 INPUT 1
LNB DC OUTPUT
ENABLED
#4 INPUT 1
LIMITS BER
1.8E-3
#4 INPUT 1
SEARCH RANGE
+/- 5000 kHz
39/114
310/114
LEVEL
050
311/11
Allows the dc voltage to be applied to the LNB via the currently selected output.
Set the BER and input signal input alarm thresholds. An alarm is generated if the BER is above its alarm threshold or the signal level below its alarm threshold.
Sets the upper and lower limits of the satellite signal acquisition process.
Minimum increment is 1 kHz.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-13
Menus
C.7.4 Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu Pages (to version
2.5.4)
This section applies to models M2/PTR/942 and M2/PTR/948B[C] (to version 2.5.4).
The input is the UHF connector.
Table C.8: Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages (to version 2.5.4)
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
7
1
9
Pages
8 selectable
10
11 selectable
12 selectable
13 editable
Display
#4 INPUT DEG ON 31/134
POST VITERBI BER n.n E - nn
#4 INPUT
UHF CHANNEL
CH: 21
#4 INPUT
GUARD INTERVAL
1/32
32/134
8MHZ
OFF: +3
33/134
#4 INPUT 34/134
OFDM CARRIER MODE
2K
#4 INPUT
CHANNEL SPACE
8MHz
35/134
36/134 #4 INPUT
MODULATION
16QAM
#4 INPUT
FEC RATE
HIGH ½
37/134
LOW 2/3
#4 INPUT 38/134
SIGNAL DEGRADATION
OFF
#4 INPUT
POST RS ERRORS nnn
39/134
#4 INPUT 311/134
HIERARCHY MODE
ALPHA = 1
#4 INPUT
311/134
HIERARCHY STREAM
HP
#4 INPUT
INPUT SELECTION
312/134
UHF NORMAL
#4 INPUT
LIMITS BER n.n E - nn
313/13
Description
This page dynamically displays the current Post-Viterbi BER value.
This is the value shown on the front panel BER meter. Also shows the status of the Signal Degradation mode (DEG ON | OFF)
This sets up the channel number and tuner frequency offset for the required service. The channel number and offset are limited to the applicable range of the tuner.
This page sets the guard interval between consecutive symbols on each carrier to prevent inter-symbol interference.
This page sets up the carrier mode of the receiver front end. The type of receiver front end may limit the option choice.
Options
1
/
32
,
1
/
16
,
1
/
8
, ¼.
2K
8K (M2/PTR/948[A] only)
This page displays the band plan channel spacing. Valid values are determined by the system hardware.
This page displays the channel coding (constellation).
6 MHz (s/w ver 2.4),
7 MHz (s/w ver 2.4),
8 MHz
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
ALPHA
¹ 0: This non-editable page displays the HIGH and LOW
FEC code rates when the transmission is hierarchical.
ALPHA = 0: This non-editable page displays a single FEC RATE when the transmission is non-hierarchical.
A test mode which degrades the incoming signal. The status on the signal degradation is shown on page 1 (DEG ON | DEG OFF)
See CAUTION following this table.
This page displays the number of errors in a single packet after
Viterbi correction.
·
If the error is 15 or more, GREATER THAN 255 ERRORS is displayed.
·
If the input is not locked, INPUT NOT LOCKED displayed.
ALPHA = 0 means that it is a non-hierarchical transmission.
1 /
2
, 2 /
3
, 3 /
4
, 5 /
6
, 7 /
8
.
OFF, 1 - 7
000 - 254
OFF (hierarchy = 0)
1, 2, 4
In hierarchy mode, this page allows a selection between high and low priority streams.
HP (high priority)
LP (low priority)
Allows the input connector to be chosen. Choices available depend on the Tuner type.
See CAUTION following this table.
UHF NORMAL
UHF INVERTED
BASEBAND –NORMAL
BASEBAND –INVERTED
This page allows the limit Post-Viterbi BER threshold. An alarm is generated if the BER is above the threshold.
Page C-14 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
CAUTIONS…
1. Software version 2.2 and earlier. If the input selection is edited between UHF and Baseband operation, whilst a signal degradation mode other than 0 is selected, it will be necessary to reselect the required signal degradation mode using the following method:
Step 1.
Select signal Degradation mode 0 on menu 4/8.
Step 2.
Reselect the signal Degradation mode required on menu 4/8.
2. When using the combination 64QAM, 3/4 FEC, 1/32 Guard Interval and 204 packet length
(29.454545 Mbit/s), the demodulator may not always lock up correctly following switch-on or after a brief loss of signal. This will be apparent from a higher than expected BER or lack of video. Normal lock up is achieved by disconnecting and reconnecting the input again.
Menus
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-15
Menus
C.7.5 Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu Pages (version
2.8.3 on)
This section applies to models M2/PTR/948C and M2/PTR/948CVL (from version 2.8.3). The input is the UHF connector.
Table C.9: Terrestrial Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages (version 2.83 on)
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
7
Pages
1
8 selectable
9
10
11 selectable
12 selectable
13 editable
14 editable
15 selectable
Display
#4 INPUT DEG ON 31/164
POST VITERBI BER n.n E – nn
#4 INPUT 32/164
SPECTRUM INVERSION
ON
#4 INPUT
GUARD INTERVAL
1/32
33/164
#4 INPUT 34/164
OFDM CARRIER MODE
2K
35/164 #4 INPUT
CHANNEL SPACE
8MHz
#4 INPUT
MODULATION
16QAM
#4 INPUT
FEC RATE
HIGH ½
36/164
37/164
LOW 2/3
#4 INPUT 38/164
SIGNAL DEGRADATION
OFF
#4 INPUT
POST RS ERRORS nnn
39/164
Description
This page dynamically displays the current Post-Viterbi BER value.
This is the value shown on the front panel BER meter. Also shows the status of the Signal Degradation mode (DEG ON | OFF)
This page selects normal or inverted spectrum.
Will exit AUTO-MODE if a manual selection is made.
Options
ON
OFF
This page sets the guard interval between consecutive symbols on each carrier to prevent inter-symbol interference
Will exit AUTO-MODE if a manual selection is made.
This page sets up the carrier mode of the receiver front end. The type of receiver front end may limit the option choice.
Will exit AUTO-MODE if a manual selection is made.
This page displays the band plan channel spacing. Valid values are determined by the system hardware.
This page displays the channel coding (constellation).
1 /
32
, 1 /
16
, 1 /
8
, ¼.
2K
8K (M2/PTR/948[A] only)
6 MHz (s/w ver 2.4),
7 MHz (s/w ver 2.4),
8 MHz
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
ALPHA ¹ 0: This non-editable page displays the HIGH and LOW
FEC code rates when the transmission is hierarchical.
ALPHA = 0: This non-editable page displays a single FEC RATE when the transmission is non-hierarchical.
A test mode which degrades the incoming signal. The status on the signal degradation is shown on page 1 (DEG ON | DEG OFF)
See CAUTION following this table.
This page displays the number of errors in a single packet after
Viterbi correction.
·
If the error is 15 or more, GREATER THAN 255 ERRORS is displayed.
·
If the input is not locked, INPUT NOT LOCKED displayed.
ALPHA = 0 means that it is a non-hierarchical transmission.
1
/
2
,
2
/
3
,
3
/
4
,
5
/
6
,
7
/
8
.
OFF, 1 - 7
Values 000 - 254
OFF (hierarchy = 0)
1, 2, 4
#4 INPUT 310/164
HIERARCHY MODE
ALPHA = 1
#4 INPUT 311/164
HIERARCHY STREAM
HP
#4 INPUT
INPUT SELECTION
312/164
UHF
#4 INPUT
LIMITS BER
313/164 n.n E – nn
#4 INPUT
UHF FREQUENCY
314/164
165.250 MHz
#4 INPUT
AUTO MODE
ON
315/164
In hierarchy mode, this page allows a selection between high and low priority streams.
This page allows the input selection type to be set.
This page allows the limit Post-Viterbi BER threshold. An alarm is generated if the BER is above the threshold.
This page sets the UHF Frequency of the tuner.
UHF Input must be selected on page 12/16.
This page allows the automatic selection of SPECTRUM
INVERSION, GUARD INTERVAL and CARRIER MODE; Causing the unit to hunt for the correct setting.
HP (high priority)
LP (low priority)
UHF
70 MHz – IF
BASEBAND
Editable range
0 – 920 MHz
ON, OFF
Page C-16 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Pages
16
Display
#4 INPUT
MER
14:00
316/16
Description
Display of the instantaneous Modulation Error Ratio (MER)
Options
Values 0 - 32
Menus
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-17
Menus
C.7.6 Digital ENG Input Menu Pages
This section applies to the M2/PTRE/xxx models.
The input is the IF connector.
Table C.10: Digital ENG Receiver Input Menu (#4) Pages,
1
Pages
2
Disabled
3 selectable
4 selectable
5
6
7
8 selectable
9
10
11 selectable
12 selectable
12 selectable
13 editable
Display Description
#4 INPUT DEG OFF 31/124
POST VITERBI n.n E – nn
#4 INPUT 32/134
UHF CHANNEL 8MHZ
This page dynamically displays the current Post-Viterbi BER value.
This is the value shown on the front panel BER meter.
Although this page is displayed by the PTRE it is disabled.
Options
None
#4 INPUT
GUARD INTERVAL
1/32
32/124
#4 INPUT 33/124
OFDM CARRIER MODE
2K
#4 INPUT
CHANNEL SPACE
8MHz
34/124
35/124 #4 INPUT
MODULATION
16QAM
#4 INPUT
FEC RATE
HIGH ½
36/124
LOW 2/3
This page sets the guard interval between consecutive symbols on each carrier to prevent inter-symbol interference.
This page sets up the carrier mode of the receiver front end.
This page displays the band plan channel spacing using this page.
Valid values are determined by the system hardware.
This page displays the channel coding (constellation).
#4 INPUT 37/124
SIGNAL DEGRADATION
OFF
#4 INPUT
POST RS ERRORS nnn
38/124
ALPHA
¹ 0: This non-editable page displays the HIGH and LOW
FEC code rates when the transmission is hierarchical.
ALPHA = 0: This non-editable page displays a single FEC RATE when the transmission is non-hierarchical.
A test mode which degrades the incoming signal. In the
M2/PTRE/942 model it should be set to OFF. The status on the signal degradation is shown on page 1 (DEG OFF).
This page displays the number of errors in a single packet after
Viterbi correction.
·
If the error is 15 or more, GREATER THAN 255 ERRORS is displayed.
·
If the input is not locked, INPUT NOT LOCKED displayed.
ALPHA = 0 means that it is a non-hierarchical transmission.
#4 INPUT
HIERARCHY MODE
ALPHA = 1
39/124
#4 INPUT
310/124
HIERARCHY STREAM
HP
#4 INPUT
INPUT SELECTION
BASEBAND NORMAL
311/124
In hierarchy mode, this page allows a selection between high and low priority streams.
Allows the input connector to be chosen.
See next line for PTRE/948C.
#4 INPUT
INPUT SELECTION
IF 70MHZ NORMAL
#4 INPUT
LIMITS BER n.n E - nn
311/124
312/12
Allows the lower or upper side-band to be chosen.
This applies to PTRE/948C only. UHF and Base-band options may be displayed but IF 70 MHz is the only active input.
This page allows the limit Post-Viterbi BER threshold. An alarm is generated if the BER is above the threshold.
1
/
32
,
1
/
16
,
1
/
8
, ¼.
2K
8K (M2/PTR/948[A] only)
6 MHz (s/w ver 2.4),
7 MHz (s/w ver 2.4),
8 MHz
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
1 /
2
, 2 /
3
, 3 /
4
, 5 /
6
, 7 /
8
.
OFF, 1 - 7
000 - 254
OFF (hierarchy = 0)
1, 2, 4
HP (high priority)
LP (low priority)
BASEBAND –NORMAL
BASEBAND –INVERTED
IF 70MHZ NORMAL (LSB)
IF 70MHZ INVERTED (USB)
When using the combination 64QAM, 3/4 FEC, 1/32 Guard Interval and
204 packet length, please refer to the CAUTION on the following page.
Page C-18 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
CAUTION…
When using the combination 64QAM, 3/4 FEC, 1/32 Guard Interval and 204 packet length (29.454545
Mbit/s), the demodulator may not always lock up correctly following switch-on or after a brief loss of signal. This will be apparent from a higher than expected BER or lack of video. Normal lock up is achieved by disconnecting and reconnecting the input again. Not applicable to version 2.3 and later.
Menus
C.8 Alarm Menu (#5) for Various Models
C.8.1 Decoder Alarm Menu Pages
This section applies to the M2/PDU/xxx models
Table C.11: Decoder Alarm Menu (#5) Pages
7 selectable
8 selectable
9 selectable
10
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
Pages
1
11
12 selectable
Display
#5 ALARM [FAIL] 1/12 4
PAGE 2 - - - - - 9 - - - - - 11
STAT T
#5 ALARM
INPUT
32/124
RELAY MASK
FAIL 1 YES
#5 ALARM
VIDEO
OK
#5 ALARM
VBI
OK
33/124
RELAY MASK
3 YES
34/124
RELAY MASK
2 YES
#5 ALARM
AUDIO 1
OK
#5 ALARM
AUDIO 2
OK
35/124
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
36/124
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
Description
This page provides a summary of the alarm status. Each number corresponds to an Alarm Menu page. An asterisk shows which page is contributing to the summary Alarm.
These pages display the status of the module or function indicated by the title on line 2.
The RELAY parameter allows an Alarm to be associated with a particular relay contact at the rear of the unit. If a relay is selected and a failure occurs, that relay activates.
More than one Alarm can be assigned to a relay contact. For example, INPUT, BER and SIG LEVEL could be assigned to
Relay 1, VIDEO to Relay 2 and Audio 1 and 2 to Relay 3. Any
Alarm condition would then operate its assigned Relay.
#5 ALARM
ASYNC
OK
#5 ALARM
SYNC
OK
37/124
RELAY MASK
NONE NO
38/124
RELAY MASK
NONE NO
#5 ALARM
CA
FAIL
#5 ALARM
TEMPERATURE
OK 27C
#5 ALARM
FAN STATUS
FAIL
39/124
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
310/124
75F
311/124
#5 ALARM
USER ALARM MASK
STORE
312/12
The MASK parameter allows an Alarm to be masked so that it does not contribute to the Summary Alarm.
This is a non-editable page. The temperature is shown in both Celsius and Fahrenheit and shows if the internal temperature exceeds 60 °C.
This non-editable page monitors pulses from the fan to ensure it is rotating.
This page allows the current mask configuration to be stored (default is all alarms masked). Restore allows the user to recall the previously stored mask (which could be the default).
Options
PAGE number
(2 to 11)
ALARM STATUS
—
OK, FAIL
RELAY —
NONE (default)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
MASK —
YES (default), NO
OK, FAIL
OK, FAIL
STORE,
RESTORE
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-19
Menus
C.8.2 Satellite Receiver Alarm Menu Pages
This section applies to M2/PSR/932[C] and all M2/P8R/942 and
M2/PSR/942 models.
Table C.12: Satellite Receiver Alarm Menu (#5) Pages
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
7 selectable
8 selectable
9 selectable
10 selectable
11 selectable
12 selectable
13
Page
1
14
15 selectable
Display
#5 ALARM 1/15 4
PAGE 2 - - - - - 9 - - - - - 14
STAT T T
#5 ALARM
INPUT
32/154
RELAY MASK
FAIL 1 YES
#5 ALARM
BER
OK
33/154
RELAY MASK
1 YES
#5 ALARM 34/154
SIG LEVEL RELAY MASK
OK 1 YES
#5 ALARM
VIDEO
OK
35/154
RELAY MASK
1 YES
#5 ALARM
VBI
OK
#5 ALARM
AUDIO 1
OK
#5 ALARM
AUDIO 2
OK
36/154
RELAY MASK
2 YES
37/154
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
38/154
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
Description
This page provides a summary of the alarm status. Each number corresponds to an Alarm Menu page. An asterisk will appear for each page contributing to the summary Alarm.
These pages display the status of the module or function indicated by the title on line 2.
Options
PAGE number
(2 to 15)
ALARM STATUS
— OK, FAIL
The RELAY parameter allows an Alarm to be associated with a particular relay contact at the rear of the unit. If a relay is selected and a failure occurs, that relay activates.
More than one Alarm can be assigned to a relay contact. For example, INPUT, BER and SIG LEVEL could be assigned to
Relay 1, VIDEO to Relay 2 and Audio 1 and 2 to Relay 3. Any
Alarm condition would then operate its assigned Relay.
RELAY —
NONE (default)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
#5 ALARM
ASYNC
OK
#5 ALARM
SYNC
OK
39/154
RELAY MASK
NONE NO
310/154
RELAY MASK
NONE NO
#5 ALARM
CA
FAIL
311/154
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
#5 ALARM 312/154
LNB VOLT RELAY MASK
FAIL NONE YES
#5 ALARM
TEMPERATURE
OK 27C
313/154
75F
#5 ALARM
FAN STATUS
OK
314/154
#5 ALARM
USER ALARM MASK
STORE
315/15
The MASK parameter allows an Alarm to be masked (YES) so that it does not contribute to the Summary Alarm.
This alarm will be raised if a short circuit occurs in the cable or LNB.
If the alarm persists after the rear panel connection is removed, then a fault exists within the Alteia.
This page is non-editable. The temperature is shown in both Celsius and
Fahrenheit. FAIL indicates that the internal temperature exceeds 60
This non-editable page monitors pulses from the fan to ensure it is rotating.
°C.
This page allows the current mask configuration to be stored (default is all alarms masked). Restore allows the user to recall the previously stored mask (which could be the default).
MASK —
YES (default),
NO
OK
FAIL
OK
FAIL
STORE,
RESTORE
Page C-20 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.8.3 Terrestrial and Digital ENG Receiver Alarm Menu
Pages
This section applies to the M2/PTR[E]/942[B][C][D] and M2/PTR/948[A] models.
Table C.13: Terrestrial Alarm Menu (#5) Pages
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
7 selectable
10 selectable
11 selectable
12 selectable
13 selectable
14
Page
1
8 selectable
9 selectable
15
16
Selectable
Display
#5 ALARM [FAIL] 1/16 4
PAGE 2 - - - - 9 - - - - 14
STAT T
#5 ALARM
INPUT
FAIL NO
32/164
RELAY MASK
1 YES
#5 ALARM
33/164
POS V BER RELAY MASK
OK 1 YES
#5 ALARM
VIDEO
OK
34/164
RELAY MASK
1 YES
#5 ALARM
VBI
OK
#5 ALARM
AUDIO 1
OK
#5 ALARM
AUDIO 2
OK
35/164
RELAY MASK
2 YES
36/164
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
37/164
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
#5 ALARM
ASYNC
OK
#5 ALARM
SYNC
OK
38/164
RELAY MASK
NONE NO
39/164
RELAY MASK
NONE NO
Description
This page provides a summary of the alarm status. Each number corresponds to an Alarm Menu page. An asterisk shows which page is contributing to the summary Alarm.
These pages display the status of the module or function
i
ndicated by the title on line 2.
The RELAY parameter allows an
Alarm to be associated with a particular relay contact at the rear of the unit. If a relay is selected and a failure occurs, that relay activates. See additional comments in section C.8.2
Options
PAGE number
(2 to 18)
ALARM
STATUS —
OK, FAIL
RELAY —
NONE (default)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
#5 ALARM
CA
FAIL
#5 ALARM
PMT
FAIL
#5 ALARM
POST RS
FAIL
310/164
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
311/164
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
312/164
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
#5 ALARM
TPS
FAIL
313/164
RELAY MASK
NONE YES
#5 ALARM
TEMPERATURE
OK 27C
314/164
75F
#5 ALARM 315/164
TIME SYNC RELAY MASK
OK NONE NO
#5 ALARM
USER ALARM MASK
316/16
STORE NONE NO
Program Map Table (PMT) not available.
Post Reed-Solomon errors
(POST RS) indicates RS Decoder failure.
Transmitter Parameter Signalling
(TPS) failed.
The MASK parameter allows an
Alarm to be masked so that it does not contribute to the
Summary Alarm.
This is a non-editable page. The temperature is shown in both Celsius and Fahrenheit and shows if the internal temperature exceeds 60 °C.
Provides an alarm if the timing recovery is not in lock.
This page allows the current mask configuration to be stored (default is all alarms masked). Restore allows the user to recall the previously stored mask (which could be the default).
MASK —
YES (default),
NO
OK, FAIL
OK, FAIL
STORE,
RESTORE
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-21
Menus
C.9 Video Menu (#6)
C.9.1 General Menus
This menu group applies to all Alteia models and allows the video to be configured and its status checked. The word OK or FAIL appears in line 1 on all pages dependent on whether the video module is running.
Table C.14: Video Menu (#6) Pages
Pages
1
2
3
4
5 selectable
6 selectable
7 selectable
8 selectable
9 selectable
Display
#6 VIDEO [OK]
RESOLUTION
720x576
1/9 4
#6 VIDEO [OK] 32/94
MODE LINE STANDARD
4.2.2
625
Description
This page displays the current video resolution and bit-rate.
This page displays the current video mode and line standard.
Options
RES(olution) —
See Annex B.
MODE —
4:2:0, 4:2:2
LINE STANDARD —
525, 625
4/3, 16/9 #6 VIDEO [OK] 33/94
PEL ASPECT RATIO
16/9
#6 VIDEO [OK] 34/94
FRAME RATE
25 Hz
#6 VIDEO [OK]
35/94
625 STANDARD
PAL-I
#6 VIDEO [OK]
36/94
525 STANDARD
NTSC M
#6 VIDEO [OK] 37/94
FAIL MODE
BLANK
#6 VIDEO [OK] 38/94
ASPECT RATIO
16/9
#6 VIDEO [OK] 39/9
LEVEL - - | +
00 PCT T
This page displays the current picture element (PEL) aspect ratio.
This page displays the current frame rate.
This page sets the output video level. The choice made is enabled when the SAVE button is pressed.
25 Hz, 30 Hz
This page sets the composite output when decoding 625-line video.
See Annex B for list of supported 625 standards.
This page sets the composite output when decoding 525-line video.
See Annex B for list of supported 525 standards.
This page allows the action to be taken on video failure to be set. It also determines the line standard during the boot period.
Identifies the aspect ratio of the monitor connected to the Alteia.
FAIL MODE —
FREEZE, NO SYNCS
(ver 2.6
®), BLANK
4/3, 16/9
±30% (Factory default is unity video.)
Page C-22 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
C.9.2 Additional Menus for Alteia plus Models
There are a number of menus that are applicable to Alteia plus models.
Menus
Table C.15: Video Menu (#6) Pages for Alteia plus Models
13 selectable
14 editable
15 editable
16 editable
Pages
10 selectable
11 editable
12 selectable
Display
#6 VIDEO
EDH
DISABLED
310/164
#6 VIDEO 311/164
EMBEDDED AUDIO DID
CHANNEL 1 2FF
#6 VIDEO
TEST PATTERN
8
312/164
STD
625
#6 VIDEO
FRAME SYNC
ENABLED
313/164
NOT LOCKED
#6 VIDEO
FRAME SYNC 625
OFFSET +13824
314/164
#6 VIDEO 315/16
FRAME SYNC 525
OFFSET +13728
+
#6 VIDEO 316/16
VIDEO OUTPUT SHAPING
CVBS – 704 PIXELS
Description
This page allows the user to enable or disable the pass-through of
Error Detection Hierarchy (EDH) data.
Options
DISABLED
ENABLED
This page allows the user to enable and set up the decoding of audio signals embedded in the video signal.
Data ID can be edited by using the LEFT and RIGHT buttons to select a hexadecimal digit and the SELECT control to change its value.
This menu allows the user to select a test pattern and have it available at the analogue video output. Pressing the RIGHT button allows the line standard to be selected; pressing the
LEFT button allows the test patterns to be selected. The
choice made is enabled when the SAVE button is
pressed.
This page allows the user to enable the use of the Frame
Sync input (using the F SYNC connector at the rear of the unit). Only available if Frame Sync Option is purchased.
This page allows the user to set the offset delay of the frame sync signal (in units of 37ns, 1 /
27
MHz). Only available if Frame Sync
Option is purchased.
This page allows the user to set the offset delay of the frame sync signal (in units of 37ns, 1 /
27
MHz). Only available if Frame Sync
Option is purchased.
This page allows shaping of the output video, depending on the encoding source.
NONE
BOTH
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
Test Pattern:
DISABLED,
1 – 8 see
Table C.16
DISABLED
ENABLED
DID
(Data ID)
0x000 to
0x7FF
(Line) STD:
625
525
+13824 to -13824
+13728 to - 13728
CVBS – 704 PIXELS
SDI – 720 PIXELS
Table C.16: Video Test Patterns (Menu #6 Page 12)
Test
5
6
3
4
7
8
Disabled
1
2
Description
Normal video
Pulse and Bar, 20T Magenta Pulse and Luminance Staircase
Multiburst
Pulse and Bar and Chrominance Staircase
Chrominance Step and Burst
Flat Field Red
Luminance Ramp
Component Ramps (YC
R
C
B
ramps)
Colour Bars
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-23
Menus
C.10 Subtitle/VBI Menu (#7)
C.10.1 Menu #7 (Software Versions 2.1 and 2.2)
This group of menus sets the Subtitle default language, enables/disables
Vertical Interval Test Signals (VITS) and enables/disables various types of
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) data.
Table C.17: Subtitle/VBI Menu (#7) Pages (Software Versions 2.1 and 2.2)
Page
1
2 selectable
3
4
5 selectable
6
7
Line
Display
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
DEFAULT LANGUAGE
NOT SUPPORTED
1/7 4
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 32/74
VITS INSERTION
ENABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
33/74
VPS PRESENT
NOT SUPPORTED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 34/74
WSS PRESENT
NOT SUPPORTED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 35/74
CC/VCHIP NOT PRESENT
DISABLED
Description
Sets the default language for the Subtitle decoder.
Enable/disable the insertion of Vertical Interval
Test Signals (VITS) into the outgoing video
VBI.
Standard Number
525
625 (UK)
625 (ITU-R)
Options
17/280
19/20/332/333
17/18/329/330
ENABLED,
DISABLED
NOT SUPPORTED
NOT SUPPORTED
Enable/disable the Closed Caption (CC) and
Parental Control (VCHIP) control into the outgoing video VBI. Line 2 indicates the presence or absence of the signal incoming.
Refer to Chapter 6, Preventive Maintenance
and Fault-finding for setting information.
525 21 ENABLED,
DISABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 36/74
AMOL 1 NOT PRESENT
NOT SUPPORTED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 37/7
AMOL 2 NOT PRESENT
NOT SUPPORTED
NOT SUPPORTED
NOT SUPPORTED
Table C.17 shows the correct operation for 4:2:0 mode. However, for
4:2:2 mode, the VBI can be encoded as video at the Encoder.
The Receiver auto-detects this and switches into pass-through mode. In this mode, any VBI can be transferred.
NOTES…
1. If the incoming video is 608 or 512 lines (4:2:2 mode) the unit will automatically be in pass-through mode. The line resolution can be checked on Menu #6, Page 1.
2. When in video pass-through mode, the pages displayed under Menu #7 may not be correct.
Page C-24 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.10.2 Menu #7 (Software Version 2.4 and Later)
This group of menus sets the Subtitle default language, enables/disables
Vertical Interval Test Signals (VITS) and enables/disables various types of
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) data.
Menu pages 3, 6, 9 and 10 are displayed in Alteia as pages 1 to 4, of 4.
Pages 1 through 10 are all displayed by Alteia plus as shown in Table C.18.
Table C.18: Subtitle/VBI Menu (#7) Pages (Software Version 2.4 and later)
4 selectable
Purchasable option.
5 selectable
Purchasable option.
6 selectable
Page
1 selectable
Purchasable option.
2 selectable
Purchasable option.
3 selectable
Display
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 1/10 4
LINE INPUT OUTPUT
21 WSS TTXT
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 32/104
TELETEXT
ENABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 33/104
VITS INSERTION
ENABLED CCIR
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 34/104
VITC INSERTION
ENABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
35/104
GCR INSERTION
ENABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 36/104
CC / VCHIP
ENABLED
Description
This menu displays the current reinsertion data available for the selected line and the data type being inserted by the unit.
The INPUT field only includes reinsertion data received over-air, not Teletext or VBI test signals.
The OUTPUT field shows data inserted by the unit based on the user’s selections – Teletext data and test signals take priority over reinsertion signals.
This menu controls the insertion of all Teletext lines. Should any conflicts occur, these signals take priority over reinsertion signals.
Enable/disable the insertion of
VITS test signals.
Enable/disable the insertion of the
VITC signal. The signal appears on two non-adjacent lines per field.
Enable/disable the Ghost
Cancellation Reference. This only
appears on the SDI output NOT the analogue output.
Enable/disable the presence of
Closed Caption / VCHIP data to be monitored and to enable or disable its reinsertion into the VBI.
Refer to Chapter 6, Preventive
Maintenance and Fault-finding for setting information.
Options
The selected LINE can be 11 to 23.
INPUT: VPS (Video Programming System)
CCVC (Closed Caption /VCHIP)
WSS (Wide Screen Signalling)
AMOL (Automatic Measure of Lineups)
VIDX (Video Index)
NONE (not available or line disabled)
OUTPUT: TTXT (EBU Teletext data)
ITS (Insertion test signals)
GCR (Ghost cancelling reference)
VITC (Vertical interval time code)
NONE
625 standard:
Teletext lines may be placed on any or all of lines 7 – 22 and 320 –
335.
Line 1:
TELETEXT
Line 2:
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED CCIR [ITU-R]
ENABLED FCC/UK
NOT SUPPORTED
525 (FCC) standard:
Lines 17/280
625 (UK) standard:
Lines 19/20/332/333
625 (ITU-R):
Lines 17/18/329/330
525 (SMPTE) standard:
Lines 14 and 16
625 (UK) standard:
Lines 19 and 21
525 standard:
Line 19
625 standard:
Line 318
DISABLED
ENABLED
NOT SUPPORTED
DISABLED
ENABLED
NOT SUPPORTED
525 standard:
Line 21
Line 1:
CC / VCHIP
Line 2:
ENABLED
DISABLED
NOT SUPPORTED
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-25
Menus
Page
7 selectable
Purchasable option.
8 selectable
Purchasable option.
9 selectable
10 selectable
Display
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 37/104
525 REINSERTION
LINE 21 ENABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
38/104
625 REINSERTION
LINE 21 ENABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 39/104
DEFAULT SUBTITLES
ENGLISH NORMAL
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 310/10
SUBTITLES
ENABLED
Description Options
This menu controls the insertion of individual lines of VBI data received over-air, e.g. WSS, Video Index.
There is no effect on the reinsertion of Closed Captions / VCHIP data,
EBU Teletext or Test Signals as they have their own control menus.
However, if VBI is on a separate
PID, then 525 Reinsertion will have an effect on the VBI services listed.
Where VBI is on a separate PID, the PID detail will not appear on any of the Front Panel displays.
This menu controls the insertion of individual lines of VBI data received over-air, e.g. WSS, Video Index.
There is no effect on the reinsertion of Closed Captions / VCHIP data,
EBU Teletext or Test Signals as they have their own control menus.
This menu allows the default subtitle language and type to be specified for the DVB subtitle decoder.
This menu allows the user to enable or disable the reinsertion of subtitles into the VBI.
525 standard:
Lines 14 to 22
(Line mirroring is used)
625 standard:
Lines 11 to 23
(Line mirroring is used)
DISABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
Language: See Annex E.
Type: See Menu #3, page 4 for type definitions.
DISABLED
ENABLED
Table C.18 shows the correct operation for 4:2:0 mode. However, for
4:2:2 mode, the VBI can be encoded as video at the Encoder.
The Receiver auto-detects this and switches into pass-through mode. In this mode, any VBI can be transferred.
NOTE…
When in video pass-through mode, the pages displayed under menu #7 may not be correct.
Page C-26 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Monitor input
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
LINE
1/10 4
INPUT OUTPUT nn xxxx yyyy
TELETEXT (see note 1)
NOTE 1: EN 300 472 Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services. Spec for conveying ITU-R System
B Teletext in Digital Video Broadcasting
(DVB) bit-streams.
NOTE 2: ATSC A-53, but takes advantage of the explanation of the additional_user_data field that says, “Any further demand for picture user data could be met by defining this part of the bit stream”. The second is a TANDBERG
Television proprietary format that is more data efficient than the one described above but, of course, is not ATSC compatible.
NOTE 3: TM 1952 Specification for conveying VBI data in DVB bit-streams.
NOTE 4: Locally hard coded data.
GCR GENERATOR
(See note 4)
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
TELETEXT PRESENT
DISABLED
VITS CCIR GENERATOR
(See note 4)
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 33/104
VITS INSERTION
ENABLED CCIR
VITC GENERATOR
(See note 4)
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 34/104
VITC INSERTION
DISABLED
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI
GCR INSERTION
ENABLED
32/104
35/104
CLOSED CAPTIONS (see notes 2 and 3)
VITS CCIR
GCR
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 36/104
CC/VCHIP PRESENT
ENABLED
CLOSED CAPTIONS
VBI DATA (see note 3)
#7 SUBTITLE/VBI 37/104
625 REINSERTION
LINE nn ENABLED
VBI DATA
Monitor output
Figure C.6: Building Up the VBI Output Data
Menus
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-27
Menus
C.11 Audio 1 Menu (#8)
This menu group allows Audio 1 to be configured and its status to be checked; it has 7 pages if the AC-3 Downmixing option is installed. The word OK or FAIL appears in line 1 on all pages dependent on whether the primary audio module is running.
Table C.19: Audio 1 Menu (#8) Pages
Page
1
2 selectable
3 selectable
4 selectable
5 selectable
6 selectable
Display
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK] 1/6 4
DIG
ENG (L) GER (R) 1FF0
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK]
32/64
OUTPUT
ANALOGUE
Description
This page displays the language that the audio module is currently decoding. A stereo channel can contain two mono languages (as shown).
·
If the Audio decoder status is FAIL, ------- is displayed.
·
If the audio stream is Dolby Digital encoded, DOLBY DIG appears on line 2.
The audio output can be configured using this page.
If required, M2/Pxx/932 models (analogue outputs only) can feed received Dolby Digital to the output for processing by an external Decoder.
Set the default language for Audio 1.
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK] 33/64
DEFAULT LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK] 34/64
ROUTING
NORMAL
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK] 35/64
SYS CLIPPING LEVEL
12 DB
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK] 36/6
LEVEL | +
n.n DB T
Set the audio output routing.
Sets the audio gain to compensate for the attenuation in the encoding process. Specified by DVB to be +18 dB.
This page sets the analogue audio output level referenced to the clipping level. In EDIT mode, the SELECT control changes the level setting in steps of 0.1 dB.
(The change is not effective until the SAVE button is pressed).
Table C.20: Audio Output Options
Options
See Annex E for a list of languages.
Refer to Table C.20.
See Annex E for a list of languages.
NORMAL
LEFT TO BOTH
RIGHT TO BOTH
6 dB – 18 dB.
±3.0 dB. Factory default is
0 dB referenced to the clipping level set in page 5.
Model
All models
M2/Pxx/94x only
Legend
ANALOGUE
IEC958 COMPRESSED
IEC958 PROFESSIONAL
IEC958 CONSUMER
Description
Analogue audio is carried on both left and right outputs.
Compressed up to 5 + 1 on right output (only if input stream is Dolby Digital encoded).
Uncompressed stereo on Right output that conforms to AES/EBU formatting.
Uncompressed stereo on Right output that conforms to SPDIF formatting.
If the AC-3 down-mixing option is installed (available as an option) then the page shown in Table C.21 is displayed. If the AC-3 decoder is presented with an elementary stream with more than two channels, the decoder down-mixes them to produce a stereo pair. The AC-3 Standard allows for downmixing to a Dolby Pro Logic compatible stereo signal
(designated LT RT) or a conventional stereo signal (designated LO RO).
Table C.21: AC-3 Down-mixing
Page
7 selectable
Display
#8 AUDIO 1 [OK] 37/7
AC3 DOWNMIXING MODE
LT RT
Options
LO RO (CONVENTIONAL STEREO: Stereo without Dolby Pro Logic Surround Sound).
LT RT (PRO LOGIC STEREO: Stereo compatible with Dolby Pro Logic Surround Sound).
Page C-28 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
C.12 Audio 2 Menu (#9)
The selections for Audio 2 are identical to those for Audio 1.
C.13 Conditional Access Menu (#10)
C.13.1 Introduction
This menu group allows the status and configuration of the Conditional
Access (CA) module to be checked.
The structure and content of this group depends on the CA system. The available CA options are:
·
No conditional access
·
VideoGuard
·
Remote Authorisation System (RAS)
·
VideoGuard and RAS
C.13.2 Menu #10 (With No Conditional Access)
Table C.22: Menu #10 Pages with no Conditional Access Installed
Pages Display
1
2
#10 CA 1/2 4
SERVICE STATUS
VGUARD UNAUTHORIZED
#10 CA
NO CA INSTALLED
32/2
Description
This page displays the current status of the conditional access module.
If neither VideoGuard nor RAS is installed, this non-editable page is displayed.
Options
Menus
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-29
Menus
C.13.3 Menu #10 (VideoGuard)
Table C.23: VideoGuard Conditional Access menu (#10) Pages
Page
1
2
3
4 selectable
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 selectable
12 selectable
Display
#10 CA
SERVICE STATUS
1/13
VGUARD AUTHORIZED
4
#10 CA
STATUS
CARD REMOVED
32/134
#10 CA
CAS ID
2305
33/134
#10 CA 34/134
VGUARD CUSTOMER ID
DIRECTOR
Description
This page displays the current status of the conditional access module.
This is the menu displayed if the VideoGuard CA system is installed. It provides CA status information.
This page displays the current CA system ID.
#10 CA
CA CODE VERSION
35/134
VERSION n n n n
#10 CA
CA BOOT VERSION
36/134
VERSION n nn
#10 CA
MODEL NUMBER
XXX nnn
37/134
#10 CA
HARDWARE TYPE nn
38/134
#10 CA 39/134
MANUFACTURER NUMBER nn
#10 CA 310/134
DOWNLOAD STATUS
XXX YY TT-NN CCC
#10 CA 311/134
MED PRIORITY STREAM
SYNC DATA
#10 CA 312/134
LOW PRIORITY STREAM
ASYNC DATA
This menu displays the current VideoGuard customer ID.
(Software version 2.2 and later.) If this is changed, the unit
MUST be repowered with the appropriate smart card in place
Factory default is DIRECTOR.
This page displays the CA code version.
This page displays the CA boot code version.
This page displays the Alteia model number.
This page displays the hardware type.
This is a unique identifier that allows a unit to be identified by the CA system.
This page displays codes relating to the download status.
The VideoGuard CA system can only decrypt six different elementary streams. There are eight specified, so these two pages select which streams remain encrypted.
The medium priority stream is de-scrambled in preference to the low priority stream. Medium priority has SYNC as its default and Low priority has ASYNC as its default.
Software version 2.3 and later
Options
See Table C.24.
See Table C.25.
See Chapter 1 for a list of model numbers and short description.
Set by the manufacturer.
See Table C.26 to
Table C.31 for option details.
Models with suffix B only
(e.g. M2/PSR/942B):
VIDEO, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2,
TELETEXT 5 , VBI, DVB
SUBTITLES, ASYNC DATA,
SYNC DATA 6 .
Other Models: NONE
5
Teletext is only available on models with suffix B, e.g. M2/PSR/942B.
6
Synchronous, high-speed, data is only available on models with suffixes A or B, e.g. M2/PSR/942A.
Page C-30 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
Table C.24: Conditional Access Status Messages (Menu #10, Page 1)
Associated Text
NO SERVICE SELECTED
CLEAR OR UNKNOWN CA
RAS 1
RAS 2 AUTHORIZED
RAS 2 UNAUTHORIZED
VGUARD AUTHORIZED
VGUARD UNAUTHORIZED
Description
A stream scrambled with RAS 1 has been detected.
A stream scrambled with RAS 2 has been detected and the unit is authorised to de-crypt it. This only appears if RAS CA software is installed.
A stream scrambled with RAS 2 has been detected and the unit is not authorised to de-crypt it. This would happen if RAS CA software were not installed.
A stream scrambled with VideoGuard has been detected and the unit is authorised to de-crypt it. This only appears if the appropriate version of
VideoGuard CA software is installed.
A stream scrambled with VideoGuard has been detected and the unit is not authorised to de-crypt it. This would happen if the appropriate version of
VideoGuard CA software were not installed. The reason for not being authorised is given in the VideoGuard menu (page 2), see Table C.25.
Authorised LED
LED is OFF
LED is OFF
LED blinks GREEN
LED is GREEN
LED is RED
LED is GREEN
Table C.25: Conditional Access System Messages (Menu #10, Page 2)
Associated Text
CARD INSERTED
CARD REMOVED
CARD INVALID
SERVICE BLOCKED
INVALID PACKET
CARD UNAUTORIZED
HARDWARE FAILURE
CLR BUT RESTRICTED
SRV BLACKED OUT
SERVICE EXPIRED
SECURITY PROBLEM
NO EMPTY PPV SLOTS
INSUFFICIENT CREDITS
PAIRING ERROR
PPV NOT AVAILABLE
USE NEW CARD
PURCHASED FAILED
BAD PPV PACKET
SPECIAL BIT SET
PURCHASE OK
PURCHASE NOT OK
Description
Card present and inserted in the Alteia
Card not present
The card inserted is not valid for descrambling the selected service
The selected service has been blocked by the broadcaster
The CA software has received an invalid packet
The card is unauthorised to descramble the selected service
The CA system has suffered a hardware failure
The selected service is in the clear but viewing is not permitted
The viewing of this service is not permitted by the broadcaster
The selected service has expired
There is a security problem with the CA system
There are no empty PPV slots
There are insufficient credits on the smart card in use
This is the wrong card for this Alteia
Purchase not permitted without call-back ability
Use new card – old card already chained
PPV purchased failed
Purchase failed
Special bit set
Purchase successful
Purchase failed
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-31
Menus
Table C.26: Download Status - Percentage (XXX)
Percentage (XXX)
000 - 100
Description
0% complete to 100% complete
Table C.27: Download Status - Status (YY)
Status (YY)
03
04
05
06
00
01
02
Description
Idle
Running
Aborted
Wait User
Wait Service
Wait Section
Finished
Table C.28: Download Status – Error Count (CCC)
Error Count (CCC)
000 - 255
Description
Wrap around count of errors
Table C.29: Download Status – Common Download Errors (TT-NN)
Error Type and
Number (TT-NN)
04-00
02-14
03-14
00-09
02-16
03-18
03-22
00-08
00-07
Description
No error (initial state)
Section unavailable (PMT)
Section unavailable (CDS)
Software already in flash (general)
Download not in service (PMT)
Incorrect software received (CDS)
Invalid signature (CDS)
Incorrect switch version (general)
Timed out (general)
Table C.30: Download Status – Error Type (TT)
Error Type (TT)
00
01
02
03
04
Description
General Error
Section Error
PMT Error
CDS Error
No Error
Page C-32 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
Table C.31: Download Status – Error Number (NN)
Error Type (TT)
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
13
14
15
10
11
12
03
04
05
00
01
02
06
07
08
09
Description
No error
Code verification error
Program flash failure
Unexpected OS message
Unexpected return
Unexpected event
Timer not available
Timed out
Switch no version
Already in flash
No inactive code
Cannot lock section
Desc not found
Invalid header
Section unavailable
Code stream not found
Not in service
CDS invalid CDS
Incorrect received
Software size invalid
SW desc inconsistent
CDB section not found
Invalid signature
C.13.4 Menu #10 (RAS)
If RAS is enabled, then a further page is displayed under menu #10.
Table C.32: Additional RAS Menu associated with Menu #10
Page
13 selectable
Display
#10 CA 313/13
CA MODE DSNG KEY
RAS FIXED XXXXXXX
Description
The DSNG Encoder has its own variant of RAS1 encryption. In order to de-scramble the signal, the Alteia should be put into the RAS MODE - DSNG and the DSNG
KEY must be entered.
Options
RAS MODE — FIXED (default)
DSNG, Secondary, Disabled.
DSNG KEY — 7 digits to match DSNG (default
º
0000000).
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-33
Menus
C.13.5 Menu #10 (BISS)
If BISS is enabled, the following pages are displayed in menu #10.
Table C.33: Additional BISS Menu Pages Associated with Menu #10
Page
14 selectable
15 selectable
Display
#10 CA
BISS MODE
314/15
SW
MODE 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX
#10 CA
BISS - - E ACTIVE ID
315/15
USER 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Description
Please refer to TANDBERG Television Customer Services regarding the use of BISS equipment.
Please refer to TANDBERG Television Customer Services regarding the use of BISS equipment.
C.14 Data Menu (#11)
Table C.34: Data Menu (#11) Pages
Page
1
2
3 selectable
Display
#11 DATA
ASYNC
OK
#11 DATA
SYNC
OK
#11 DATA
TSO
ENCRYPTED
BITRATE
1/4 4
9600 BAUD
32/44
BITRATE
64 KBITS/S
33/44
Description
This page displays the status and baud-rate of the asynchronous data module (supported
after v2.1).
·
If the module is running, the page displays the legend OK and shows the current baud-rate.
·
If the module is not running, the page displays the legend FAIL and the BITRATE is shown as - - - - -.
This page displays the status and baud-rate of the synchronous data module. Only available on models with suffix B only (e.g. M2/PSR/942B).
·
If the module is running, the page displays the legend OK and shows the current bit-rate.
·
If the module is not running, the page displays the legend FAIL and the BITRATE is shown as - - - - -.
This CA dependent page allows selection of the route the transport stream takes within the unit.
·
ENCRYPTED: Select encrypted if the transport stream is to pass to the TSO without going through the CA module. Depending on the CA system used, the data will be either partially or fully decrypted. See CAUTION following this table.
CAUTION…
Software version 2.1.1 or earlier.
In the M2/PTR/942 receiver, the Encrypt mode (Menu #11, page 3) should always be used.
Page C-34 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.15 Timers Menu (#12)
This set of pages allow the current time and date to be set. It also allows a time to be allocated to the operation of an auxiliary relay or to reconfigure the unit to a specified preset.
NOTE…
The time is also set from a valid incoming transport stream.
Table C.35: Timers Menu (#12) Pages
Page
1
2 selectable
Display
#12 TIMERS
TIME
13:30
1/2 4
DATE
11 Jun 2000
#12 TIMERS 32/2
TIME ZONE
GMT+00:00
Description
This page displays the current time and date being used by the Alteia.
·
If the unit is locked to a stream, this is locked to time information contained in the stream.
·
If the lock is lost, the unit attempts to keep the time locally until lock is reacquired.
·
If the unit has not locked to a valid stream since power up, the time and date fields are set to -----------
This page allows the entry of local time information. 00.00 (default) local offset. The time can be altered in increments of 30 minutes.
C.16 System Menu (#13)
C.16.1 Introduction
The set of pages shown in Table C.36 is modified if the Director system is installed and the unit is in LOCAL LOCKOUT.
Versions 2.2 and later have 21 pages (pages 12 and 13 removed)
Table C.36: System Menu (#13) Pages
Page
1 selectable
2 editable
3 editable
4 selectable
5 selectable
Display
#13 SYSTEM
CONTROL MODE
LOCAL ONLY
#13 SYSTEM
SET PIN
T T T T
1/23
4
32/234
Description Options
This page allows the operating mode of the Alteia to be selected.
·
The unit can be in either LOCAL ONLY (front panel) or REMOTE ONLY.
·
If the receiver is part of an Director Systems, the receiver can also be in OVER-AIR or
LOCAL LOCKOUT mode.
Director only: Changing the PIN is accomplished by entering the current PIN number then pressing the SAVE button. This displays the page shown. Page 2 allows the new PIN to be set and the setting confirmed. This is used to set a new PIN to override the LOCAL LOCKOUT state.
This page is displayed as a confirmation for the setting.
Sets the Remote Control address of the unit.
3 LSDs of serial number (default)
#13 SYSTEM
REMOTE ADDRESS
33/234
341
#13 SYSTEM 34/234
REMOTE INTERFACE
RS232
-
#13 SYSTEM
LCD CONTRAST
T
35/234
+
Switches the Remote Interface between RS-232 (default) and RS-485.
Allows the LCD display contrast to be set.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-35
Menus
Page
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 editable
22 selectable
23 selectable
Display
#13 SYSTEM 36/234
SELF TEST REPORT
NO FAULTS REPORTED
#13 SYSTEM
MODEL
PSR / 940
37/234
#13 SYSTEM 38/234
MODEL OPTIONS
ASI / DAC3/ VG05 / RAS
#13 SYSTEM 39/234
DEMUX PART NUMBER
Xnnnn
#13 SYSTEM 310/234
DEMUX SERIAL NUMBER
XXXXXXXX
#13 SYSTEM 311/234
DEMUX APP CODE VER
XXXXXXXXXXX
#13 SYSTEM 312/234
DEMUX CORE CODE VER
XX.XX
#13 SYSTEM 313/234
DEMUX DRV CODE VER
XX.XX
#13 SYSTEM 314/234
DEMUX DIAG CODE VER
XX.XX
#13 SYSTEM
315/234
OUTPUT PART NUMBER
S8715-1
#13 SYSTEM 316/234
U / P PART NUMBER
XXXXXXXX
#13 SYSTEM 317/234
U / P CODE VERSION
XXXXXXX
#13 SYSTEM
318/234
I / P PART NUMBER
S8675-1
#13 SYSTEM 319/234
I / P CODE VERSION
NOT APPLICABLE
#13 SYSTEM 320/234
RESTORE SYSTEM
DEFAULTS
#13 SYSTEM
321/234
RESET LOCKOUT PIN
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
#13 SYSTEM 322/234
SMALL RBUFF MODE
DISABLE
#13 SYSTEM
525 VIDEO START
LINE 23
323/23
Description
The displays the result of the power-up self-test.
Displays the Model number of the unit.
Displays any installed options.
This set of menus allows
the make up of the
Demultiplexer card to be identified.
This is the version on the manual cover.
Removed on version 2.2
and later.
Removed on version 2.2
and later.
This allows the output card to be identified.
This allows the microprocessor card to be identified.
This allows the code version of the microprocessor card to be identified.
This allows the input card to be identified.
This allows the code version of the input card to be identified.
This menu allows the factory defaults to be restored. It does not reset the Local Override PIN or Service Presets. See Annex F for Factory
Defaults.
Allows the 4-digit PIN used to override the LOCAL LOCKOUT mode to be reset to a known value (0000). This is used in emergencies only.
13-digit PIN
This menu allows the receiver’s small rate buffer mode to be enabled or disabled.
When decoding a signal generated by one of the M2/ENC/E5xxx
Encoders or any other manufacturers Encoder, the small rate buffer should be disabled.
For any earlier Encoder, the small rate buffer should be enabled.
This allows the start line for 525-line standard to be specified.
Options
ENABLE,
DISABLE (Default)
22, 23
Page C-36 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.16.2 Using the SMALL RBUFF MODE (Menu #13, Page 22)
When to Disable the SMALL RBUFF MODE
Disable the SMALL RBUFF MODE when the transport stream has been encoded by any of the following families of TANDBERG Television
Encoders:
·
System 3000 M2/ENC/E5xx0
· evolution 5000 M2/ENC/E5xx1
Disabling the buffer is the factory default.
When to Enable the SMALL RBUFF MODE
Enable the SMALL RBUFF MODE when the transport stream has been encoded by any of the following families of TANDBERG Television
Encoders
·
System 3000 Mobile Contribution Encoders M2/ENC/E54xx and
M2/ENC/E5500
·
System 3000 12U and 6U Encoders M2/EDS[3]/…
If trouble is encountered when decoding a non-TANDBERG 4:2:2 transmission, enabling the Small Rate Buffer may resolve the problem.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-37
Menus
C.16.3 Director System
Using the PIN Number
The PIN number is required so that the LOCAL LOCKOUT command
(sent over-air) can be temporarily overridden.
#13 SYSTEM
CONTROL MODE
LOCAL LOCKOUT
1/23 4
Attempting to change the control mode from LOCAL LOCKOUT displays a
The factory default is 0000
If the password is correct, pressing SAVE changes the CONTROL MODE to
#13 SYSTEM
PLEASE ENTER PIN
* * * *
1/23 4
1/23
4
#13 SYSTEM
PIN INVALID
#13 SYSTEM
CONTROL MODE
LOCAL ONLY
Moving back into the Over-Air mode automatically puts the unit into LOCAL
#13 SYSTEM
CONTROL MODE
LOCAL LOCKOUT
1/23 4
If the password is invalid, pressing SAVE displays a message and, after 3 seconds,
1/23 4
This state is temporary (as a LOCAL LOCKOUT can be permanently removed only by an Over-Air command).
Figure C.7: Using the PIN Number (Director Systems)
Setting the PIN Number
#13 SYSTEM
CONTROL MODE
LOCAL LOCKOUT
1/23 4
#13 SYSTEM
SET PIN
* * * *
32/234
Use this screen to set the PIN as required.
If the password is valid, pressing SAVE changes the PIN and the SET PIN display is
#13 SYSTEM 32/234
PLEASE ENTER OLD PIN
* * * *
This acts as a password control.
If the password is invalid, pressing SAVE displays a message and, after
3 seconds, the SET PIN display is entered with the old PIN still valid.
#13 SYSTEM
PIN INVALID
* * * *
32/234 #13 SYSTEM
SET PIN
* * * *
32/234
Figure C.8: Setting the PIN Number (Director Systems)
Page C-38 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Menus
C.17 Engineering Menu (#14)
The pages in this menu display low-level system status information. It is accessed by pressing the RIGHT button whilst rotating the MENU control.
Table C.37: Engineering Menu (#14) Pages
Page
1
2
3
4
5 editable
6 editable
7 editable
8 editable
9 editable
10 editable
11
12
Display
#14 ENGINEERING
SERVICE ID
1/12 4
#14 ENGINEERING 32/124
TRANSPORT STREAM ID
#14 ENGINEERING 33/124
ORIGINAL NETWORK ID
#14 ENGINEERING 34/124
NETWORK ID
#14 ENGINEERING 35/124
VIDEO PID
#14 ENGINEERING
36/124
AUDIO1 PID
#14 ENGINEERING 37/124
AUDIO2 PID
#14 ENGINEERING 38/124
PCR PID
#14 ENGINEERING 39/124
ASYNC DATA PID
#14 ENGINEERING
310/124
SYNC DATA PID
#14 ENGINEERING 311/12Ø
TELETEXT DATA
NOT SUPPORTED
#14 ENGINEERING
312/12
EMM PID
NOT SUPPORTED
Description
Current Service setting.
Current Service setting.
Current Service setting.
Current Service setting.
The PID is reset by reselecting the Service from the Service Menu (#3).
The PID is reset by reselecting the Service from the Service Menu (#3).
The PID is reset by reselecting the Service from the Service Menu (#3).
Current Service setting.
The PID is reset by reselecting the Service from the Service Menu (#3).
The PID is reset by reselecting the Service from the Service Menu (#3). Supported by models having the suffixes A or B (e.g. M2/PSR/942B).
Current Service setting. (Not supported at ver 2.3; Version 2.32 supports Teletext).
Current Service setting. (Not supported at ver 2.3.)
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page C-39
Menus
BLANK
Page C-40 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Annex D
D.
Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
Contents
D.1 Configuring Alteia for use with Director.....................D-3
D.1.1 Getting Started..............................................D-3
D.1.2 DO NOT… ....................................................D-3
D.1.3 Using the Alteia in the Over-air Mode...........D-3
D.2 Response to Over-air Commands.............................D-4
D.2.1 General.........................................................D-4
D.2.2 Display On-screen Display (OSD)
Messages .....................................................D-4
D.2.3 Store Carrier Data.........................................D-4
D.2.4 Set Power-up Channel..................................D-4
D.2.5 Force Carrier Retune....................................D-4
D.2.6 Force Service Selection................................D-5
D.2.7 Set Emergency Channel...............................D-5
D.2.8 Set Relays ....................................................D-5
D.2.9 Set Default Language...................................D-5
D.2.10 Local Lockout................................................D-5
D.2.11 Abort NCP Command...................................D-5
D.2.12 Fingerprinting Overt/Covert and
Enable/Disable Product ................................D-5
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page D-1
Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
BLANK
Page D-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
D.1 Configuring Alteia for use with Director
D.1.1 Getting Started
You must have VideoGuard CA, a Director smart card and be tuned to a
Director stream.
Insert the Director smart card before tuning to the service.
Check that the unit has VideoGuard installed (Menu #13, page 8).
Set the Receiver to OVER-AIR mode (Menu #13, page 1). The REMOTE
CONTROL LED should be lit.
Check that the unit is authorised for de-scrambling the selected service
(Menu #10, page 1 SERVICE STATUS should read VGUARD AUTHORIZED.)
NOTES...
1. The CA system is unrecognised if the service is shown as CLEAR (that is, unscrambled).
2. In OVER-AIR mode, menu items can not be edited. The Receiver should be moved to LOCAL control for editing.
D.1.2 DO NOT…
Repeatedly insert and remove the Director smart card.
D.1.3 Using the Alteia in the Over-air Mode
This section describes the behaviour of the Alteia when it is controlled over-air using the Receiver Control part of the Director PC GUI.
It is assumed that the Receiver is entitled to receive Director commands.
Consult the Director Control PC GUI manual for more information.
The following commands are supported:
·
Display On-screen Display (OSD) Messages
·
Store Carrier Data
·
Set Power-up Channel
·
Force Carrier Retune
·
Force Service Selection
·
Set Emergency Channel
·
Set Relays
·
Set Default Language
·
Local Lockout
·
Abort NCP Command
·
Fingerprinting Overt/Covert
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page D-3
Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
D.2 Response to Over-air Commands
D.2.1 General
This section describes the response of the Receiver to Over-air commands.
D.2.2 Display On-screen Display (OSD) Messages
Displays a text string on the LCD front panel. The display is forced to
MENU # 1 page 6, STATUS MESSAGE. The message is displayed for a set time or until cleared from the Head-End.
NOTE...
Unlike the previous System 3000 Receivers, the viewing Monitor does NOT display messages (except fingerprinting), all user interaction is via the front panel.
D.2.3 Store Carrier Data
Stores a particular service as a preset channel. Subsequently, the head-end can force a service selection from this preset – see Force
Service Retune following. Director presets are different to those set up in
LOCAL ONLY mode (see MENU #2 PRESET). They are not visible to the user on the front panel LCD.
D.2.4 Set Power-up Channel
Sets the Receiver power-up service. If the Emergency Channel has not been set, it is set to this service.
If neither the Emergency nor Power-up Channel have been set, the
Alteia will be in an indeterminate state at power-up.
NOTE...
This is different to the situation in LOCAL ONLY mode, which chooses the service it last received.
D.2.5 Force Carrier Retune
Forces the Receiver to retune to a different frequency and/or service. This could be a service on a different feed (e.g. LNB input 2) or a service previously set up using the Store Carrier Data command.
Timeouts allow the Receiver to revert to the original service after the time has expired. If the command fails, the Emergency channel is used. Enter a timeout of not less than 15 secs (except 0 to permanently switch to the new service) to give the Receiver time to retune.
This command fails if the LNBs are not set up realistically (which may happen if the source is changed).
Take care when retuning to services on different LNB inputs. Force Service
Selection is more efficient if the required service is on the same frequency and LNB input.
Page D-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
D.2.6 Force Service Selection
Forces the Receiver to decode a different service or stored channel (which may require a retune). The command is generally used to hop between services. The Director system has to be informed of the frequency,
FEC-rate and symbol-rate for each stream. This is set up using the MCC or
MEM. (The Director User Interface and the Director core require restarting to register changes that have been set in the MCC or MEM.)
D.2.7 Set Emergency Channel
Sets the service to use in the event of a selection failure. Is activated after a specified time has elapsed. If not set, the Power-up Channel is assumed.
Setting the Emergency Channel allows a failure situation to be recovered.
D.2.8 Set Relays
Switches the general-purpose relays. This command does not affect the summary alarm relay.
D.2.9 Set Default Language
Sets an audio decoding preference for Audio 1 and Audio 2 when selecting a service. The Alteia supports a number of default languages, please refer to the manual. If the command does not contain a language on the supported list, it is ignored.
D.2.10 Local Lockout
Locks out the LOCAL CONTROL mode but status information can still be viewed. All Director commands are functional. The Receiver can be unlocked locally using a PIN number or over-air using Allow Local Access.
D.2.11 Abort NCP Command
Aborts commands that have been sent but not executed. Fingerprinting and Enable/Disable Product cannot be aborted. If a command is received which has an expired execute time, it is acted on immediately.
D.2.12 Fingerprinting Overt/Covert and Enable/Disable
Product
The Receiver fully supports this function.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page D-5
Using the Alteia [plus] with the Director System
BLANK
Page D-6 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
NO
5
31
34
22
24
14
135
19
21
82
25
40
52
42
44
50
49
E.
LANGUAGE
ARABIC
BASA
BENGALI
CHINESE
CZECH
DANISH
DUTCH
ENGLISH
FINNISH
FRENCH
GERMAN
GREEK
GUJARATI
HEBREW
HINDI
HUNGARIAN
ICELANDIC
INDONESIAN
Annex E
Language Abbreviations
The Alteia supports the following languages. These are shown in alphabetical order.
ABBREVIATION
GUJ
HEB
HIN
HUN
ICE
IND
FIN
FRE
GER
GRK
CZE
DAN
DUT
ENG
ARA
BAS
BEN
CHI
27
112
117
123
83
90
94
95
128
130
NO
36
51
53
55
61
LANGUAGE
IRISH
ITALIAN
JAPANESE
JAVANESE
KOREAN
MALAY
NORWEGIAN
PORTUGESE
ROMANIAN
RUSSIAN
SPANISH
SWEDISH
THAI
TURKISH
URDU
VIETNAMESE
ABBREVIATION
SPA
SWE
THA
TUR
URD
VIE
IRI
ITA
JAP
JAV
KOR
MAY
NOR
POR
ROM
RUS
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page E-1
Language Abbreviations
The following non-ISO languages are supported
LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION
MAIN
AUX
INTERNATIONAL SOUND
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 5
AUDIO 6
AUDIO 7
AUDIO 8
AUDIO 9
AUDIO 10
AUDIO 11
AUDIO 12
AUDIO 13
AUDIO 14
AUDIO 15
AUDIO 16
AAD
AAE
AAF
AAG
AAH
AAI
AAJ
AAK
AAL
AAM
AAN
AAO
AAP
ONE
TWO
INT
AAA
AAB
AAC
The non-ISO languages allow tagging of audio without reference to specific languages. The system can then transmit two languages (Main and Auxiliary) which could be any type of audio.
NOTE…
The non-ISO languages need to be user defined in the MCC, MEM or Mobile Contribution Encoder for them to be available.
Page E-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Annex F
Menu
#4 Input
#5 Alarm
#6 Video
Alteia
plus
only
#7 Subttle/VBI
F.
Factory Defaults
Alteias are dispatched with the following factory defaults. These can be restored at any time using System Menu (#13). All other parameters are unaffected by restoring the factory defaults.
Page Description
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
15
2
3
12
13
14
7
8
9
5
6
10
11
2 (M2/PDU/…) SOURCE
3 (M2/PSR/…) RF INPUT
9 LNB DC Output.
Various RELAY - allocation of an alarm to an auxiliary relay contact.
MASK - all alarms are unmasked so that they do contribute to the
Summary Alarm.
625 STANDARD
525 STANDARD
FAIL MODE
ASPECT RATIO
LEVEL.
EDH
EMBEDDED AUDIO
DID
TEST PATTERN
FRAME SYNC
FRAME SYNC 625 OFFSET
FRAME SYNC 525 OFFSET
TELETEXT PRESENT
VITS INSERTION
VITC INSERTION
GCR INSERTION
CC / VCHIP INSERTION
525 REINSERTION
625 REINSERTION
DEFAULT SUBTITLES
SUBTITLES
Default
AUTO
1
DISABLED
NONE
NO
PAL I
NTSC M
BLANK
16:9
0% (calibration unaffected)
DISABLED
DISABLED
2FF
DISABLED
DISABLED
0
Unaffected
Unaffected
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ALL DISABLED
ALL DISABLED
ENGLISH NORMAL
DISABLED
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page F-1
Factory Defaults
Menu
#8 Audio
#10 CA
Page
6
7
4
11
2
3
4
5
12
13
14
#11 Data
#12 Timers
#13 System
5
22
23
2
3
4
3
2
1
Description
OUTPUT
DEFAULT LANGUAGE
ROUTING
SYS CLIPPING LEVEL
LEVEL - referenced to the System Clipping Level.
AC3 DOWNMIXING MODE
VGUARD CUSTOMER ID (s/w ver 2.2 and later).
MED PRIORITY STREAM - required by the VideoGuard CA system.
LOW PRIORITY STREAM - required by the VideoGuard CA system.
RAS MODE - type of control word.
DSNG TYPE - key.
BISS MODE
KEY
TSO
TIMEZONE - allows a local offset to be entered.
If Director installed – CONTROL MODE.
LOCKOUT PIN
If Director installed – PIN.
REMOTE ADDRESS - sets the remote control address of the unit.
REMOTE INTERFACE - sets the remote control connector format.
LCD CONTRAST
SMALL RBUFF MODE
525 VIDEO START
Default
ANALOGUE
ENGLISH
NORMAL
12 dB
0 dB
Lt Rt (Conventional Stereo)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
FIXED
000000
DISABLED
000000000000
DECRYPTED
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
0000
Unaffected
RS-232
Unaffected
DISABLED
23
Page F-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Annex G
G.
Quick Reference Guide
This annex brings together information that allows the Alteia to be put into service quickly.
G.1 Setting up the Input (Menu #4)
G.1.1 M2/PSR/9xx, M2/P8R/9xx Satellite Receiver
Table G.1 steps through the setting up the Satellite Receiver using menu #4. The transmission parameters must be known before starting.
Table G.1: Tuning the Satellite Receiver
Step Action (Menu #4)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Go to Menu #4, page 3 and select the RF Input.
The receiver takes its signal from the input specified.
Go to Menu #4, page 6, select the Polarisation and the Modulation Mode. Press SAVE.
Go to Menu #4, page 7, select the LNB Type and enter the LNB Local Oscillator Frequency. Press SAVE.
If the LNB is set to NONE, the LO frequency appears as a set of dashes. If NORMAL, the LO frequency is the current value. If set to DUAL, the LO frequency displayed is the lowest.
If the LNB type is DUAL, go to page 8 and enter the LO FREQ 2 TYPE and switchover frequency (SW OVR FREQ).
Press SAVE.
A DUAL LNB has two LO frequencies, switching between them is by 22 kHz tone.
Go to Menu #4, page 4 and enter the Satellite Channel Frequency. Press SAVE.
This sets up the RF stage in the receiver.
Go to Menu #4, page 5, select the FEC Rate and enter the Symbol Rate Press SAVE.
This sets up the overhead rates.
The Tuner should now be locked to the incoming transport stream.
At this stage, the TUNER LOCK LED should light and the BER meter operate to show that the Receiver has picked up the signal.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page G-1
Quick Reference Guide
G.1.2 M2/PTR/9xx Terrestrial Receiver
Table G.2: Tuning the DTTV Receiver
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
Action (Menu #4)
Go to Menu #4, page 8 and ensure the SIGNAL DEGRADATION mode is switched OFF.
This is a test mode that degrades the picture by a known amount. The status of the SIGNAL DEGRADATION mode is shown in line 1 of pages 1 and 2 (alongside the label SD).
Go to Menu #4, page 12 and choose the appropriate INPUT.
Choose the UHF CHANNEL and required OFFSET.
This starts the tuning process.
Set the GUARD INTERVAL and OFDM CARRIER MODE to suit the system hardware. This automatically sets the channel spacing (can be checked on page 6).
For version 2.8.3 on Go to Menu #4, page 15 and select AUTO MODE. This page allows the automatic selection of SPECTRUM INVERSION, GUARD INTERVAL and CARRIER MODE.
If hierarchy is present (check on page 11), select the priority multiplex required.
The final SAVE action will LOCK the receiver to the chosen incoming stream.
G.1.3 M2/PDU/9xx Decoder
Table G.3: Setting-up the Decoder
Step
1.
2.
Action (Menu #4)
Go to Menu #4, page 2 and select the required input.
This sets the input for the Alteia input. If Auto is chosen, ensure that the signal is only routed to one connector at a time.
Press the SAVE button to store the option.
G.2 Service Configuration (Menu #3)
G.2.1 Setting Up a Service
Each transport stream may contain many Services. Menu #3 allows a
Service to be chosen as current and the profile of its components to be specified.
Table G.4: Selecting a Service
Step
1.
2.
Action (Menu #3)
Go to Menu #3, page 1 and select the required Service.
The EDIT mode cannot be entered unless there are available Services.
This page shows the total number of Services available in the incoming transport stream. Use EDIT and
SELECT to select the required Service.
Press SAVE.
This stores the Service as the Current Service.
Page G-2 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Quick Reference Guide
G.2.2 Setting Up the Power-up Service
Menu #2 allows a Service to be chosen as the Power-up default. Follow the steps in Table G.5.
Table G.5: Selecting a Power-up Service
Step Action (Menu #2)
1.
2.
Go to Menu #2, page 3 and select the required Service
(or last valid service).
This sets the service to which the Alteia will configure on power-up.
Press SAVE.
This stores the service as the power-up service.
G.2.3 Setting up a Pre-set Service
Follow the steps in
Table G.6
to store the current Service as a pre-set.
Table G.6: Setting up a Pre-set Service
Step Action (Menu #2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use the menus to set up the unit so that the required Service is current.
This selects the Service and associated parameters for the pre-set process
Display page 2 of the pre-set menu (#2).
(The Service Name in this display is truncated to 11 characters)
This displays the menu which allows the Current Service to be stored at a chosen location (00 - 19). If there is no
Current Service, the menu display reads NOTHING TO STORE.
Select a location to store the pre-set.
The EDIT mode cannot be entered unless a valid Service being decoded.
Use EDIT and SELECT to step through the stored items. This allows a specific location to be chosen. Any vacant locations are marked by the legend [EMPTY].
Press SAVE.
Confirmation is required before the selection is stored.
CONFIRM the selection.
This stores the current Service and its associated parameters as a pre-set in the selected location. This adds the
Service to the list displayed on page 1.
G.2.4 Selecting the Default Audio Language
Page 3 of Menus #8 and #9 allows the audio channels default language to be specified. The Alteia uses the default languages, if it can’t find these, then them first language specified in the PMT is used on Audio 1 and the second on Audio 2. Menu #3, Pages 2 and 3 can be used to override the default.
Table G.7: Selecting the Default Audio Language
Step Action (Menu #8, #9)
1.
2.
3.
Go to Menu #8 or #9, page 3 as required.
This displays the current default language.
Select the required audio language(s).
Use EDIT, SELECT and SAVE to select the required language.
Press SAVE to store the choice.
The language profile is now set.
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Page G-3
Quick Reference Guide
BLANK
Page G-4 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index
The following conventions are used in this manual: a page number entry in bold indicates a reference to a heading; a page number entry in italic is a reference to a table or figure; otherwise the page number indicates a reference to an entry on that page.
A
AC3 downmixing mode conventional stereo, C-28 pro logic stereo, C-28
AGC. See automatic gain control air flow, 2-4 alarm asynchronous data, 4-5 closed captions alarm, 4-5, 6-6 decoder menu, C-19 digital ENG receiver menu (#5), C-21 output summary, 1-10 post Reed-Solomon errors (P RS ERRS), C-21 program map table (PMT) not available, C-21 relay specification, B-19 satellite receiver menu, C-20 set BER threshold, C-13 set input level threshold, C-13 summary, 4-4 terrestrial receiver menu (#5), C-21 transmitter parameter signalling (TPS), C-21
Alteia plus enhanced features, 1-8 high-speed data, 1-10 what is it, 1-3
AMOL1 and 2. See Neilson coding analogue composite video output connector, 2-18
ASI, output mode, 3-15 aspect ratio, C-22 asynchronous data alarm, 4-5 default decoding, C-11 fault-finding, 6-5 asynchronous serial interface (ASI), 1-12, 5-3 byte-mode and single packet burst mode, 1-12, 5-3 copper input connector, 2-11 copper output connector, 5-3 fibre-optic input connector, 2-11 fibre-optic output connector, 5-4 attenuator, 2-5, 2-15, 2-16 fitted in M2/PTRE/942, 1-15 audio analogue connector, 2-19, B-16 load impedance, B-16 output impedance, B-16 audio 1 current language, C-28 current preset language, C-10 default language, C-28 menu (#8), C-28 output, C-28 output level, C-28
PID display, C-39 routing, C-28 system gain, C-28 audio 2 current language, C-29 current preset language, C-10 default language, C-29 menu (#9), C-29 output, C-29 output level, C-29
PID display, C-39 routing, C-29 system gain, C-29 clipping level, B-16 compression layers, B-16 decoding, 1-7, 1-8 digital connector, 2-20, B-17 digital load impedance, B-17 digital output, B-6 embedded in the video (menu), C-23 linear, 1-8, 5-4 modes, B-17 monitor connector, B-17 monitor specification, B-17
MPEG-2 data rates, B-16 output
AC3 downmxing conventional stereo, C-28 pro logic stereo, C-28 analogue, C-28 analogue specification, B-16 digital specification, B-17
IEC 958 compressed, C-28
IEC 958 consumer, C-28
IEC 958 professional, C-28 impedance, B-17 summary, 1-10 performance, B-6 sampling rates, B-16 selecting the component, 3-11
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index-1
Index
supported bit-rates, B-6 supported resolutions, B-6 supported specifications, B-6 synchronisation external source, 2-16 test connector, 2-21 auto mode, 3-8, C-16 automatic gain control (AGC), 2-24 specification, B-18 auxiliary relay interface, 2-24 automatic gain control (AGC) output, B-18 discrete and summary alarm relays, B-19
B
baseband input connector, 2-15 basic interoperable scrambling system (BISS), 1-11 action of Authorized LED, 4-4 key, C-34 mode, C-34 bit error ratio satellite receiver displayed value, C-13 set alarm threshold, C-13 testing the front-panel meter, 6-5 bit-rate asynchronous data, C-34 supported audio, B-6 supported video, B-4 synchronous data, C-34
BS 415, 1990, 2-8 button descriptions, 1-19 byte-mode, 1-12, 3-15, 5-3, B-15 fibre optic input, 2-11 fibre-optic output, 5-4 audio analogue output, 2-19 audio digital output, 2-20 audio test output, 2-21 baseband input, 2-15 digital video output, 2-18
DVB-SPI input, 2-12 frame sync, 2-16 if input (digital ENG), 2-16
L-band (#n) input, 2-13, 2-14 sacrifical F-type, 2-14 remote control input, 2-23 rf input (terrestrial), 2-15
RS-232 data output, 2-22
RS-422 data output, 2-21 transport stream (SPI) output, 2-17 video test output, 2-19 constellation, C-14, C-16, C-18 construction, 1-19 control connector information, B-19 front panel, 1-19 gaining local control, 1-17 modem baud rate, 1-18 modes, 1-16 remote control address, C-35 remote control mode, 1-18 system mode, C-35
C-Tick marking, B-22 customer services address, viii
C
calendar, 1-8 cautions, meaning of, vi
CE mark, B-22 cleaning, 6-3 clipping level, audio, B-16 clock, 1-8 closed captions (CC), 1-8, C-24, C-25 alarm, 4-5, 6-6 compliance
CE mark, B-22 electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), B-21 safety, B-21 composite video level, B-15, B-16 compression layers, audio, B-16 conditional access, 1-8, 1-11, C-29 assign low priority stream, C-30 assign medium priority stream, C-30 basic interoperable scrambling system (BISS), 1-11
BISS mode, C-34
DSNG key, C-33 no conditional access menu (#10), C-29
RAS mode, C-33 remote authorisation system (RAS), 1-8, 1-11 setting up, 3-12 system messages, C-31
VideoGuard, 1-8, 1-11, 1-18
CA boot code version, C-30
CA status information, C-30
CA system ID, C-30 menu (#10), C-30 module status information, C-30 connectors analogue composite video output, 2-18
ASI copper input, 2-11 copper output, 5-3
Index-2
D
data asynchronous alarm, 4-5 bit-rate, C-34 default decoding, C-11 fault-finding, 6-5
PID display, C-39 status, C-34 error detection hierarchy (EDH) (menu), C-23 menu (#11), C-34
MPEG-2 audio data rates, B-16 outputs, 1-8 partially decrypted mode, B-15
RS-232 connector, 2-22, B-18
RS-232 specification, B-18
RS-422 connector, 2-21, B-18
RS-422 specification, B-18 selecting the component, 3-12 synchronous bit-rate, C-34 default decoding, C-11
PID display, C-39 status, C-34 date, current, C-35 decoder
ASI copper input connector, 2-11, B-8
ASI fibre-optic input connector, 2-11, B-8 input menu (#4) pages, C-12 input specification, B-8 input summary, 1-12
M2/PDU/942C[D] output transport stream restrictions, 1-9 setting up the input, 3-9, G-2
SPI input connector, 2-12
SPI input connectorr, B-8 system, 1-11 default
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index
power-up service, 3-9 preset service, 3-16, C-9 default settings asynchronous data decoding, C-11 audio 1 default language, C-28 audio 2 default language, C-29
Director, C-30 factory, 6-5, F-1 language decoding, C-11 line standard, C-22 power-up service, C-9 subtitles decoding, C-11 synchronous data decoding, C-11 teletext decoding, C-11 depth of equipment, B-19 digital audio output, B-6 audio output connector, 2-20 video output connector, 2-18 digital ENG receiver forward error correction (FEC), C-18 guard interval, C-18 hierarchy, C-18 if input connector, 2-16, B-14 input menu pages, C-18 input summary, 1-16 modulation constellation, C-18 modulation mode, C-18 setting up the input, 3-7, 3-8 system, 1-16 digital satellite news gathering (DSNG) encoder, 3-13
Director assumes use of RF input 1, 1-7 control words, 3-13 disabled on high ts bit-rates, B-15 forced carrier retune, 1-7
GUI – RF input labelling, 1-7 over-air control, 1-18 setting the PIN number, C-38 status message page, C-7, C-8 system, 1-8, 1-14 using the PIN number, C-38 version III, 1-7
Director system. See Annex D disposal, 6-9
DSNG stream, C-33 dual channel mono, audio, B-17
DVB subtitles, C-10. See also subtitles current preset language, C-11 current preset type, C-11
DVB-SPI, 2-12
E
earth, technical, 2-8, 2-9 edit state, front panel, 1-17 electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), vi
EN 55022 compliance statement, 2-6
FCC compliance statement, 2-6 removing the covers, 2-3
EMC. See electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
EN 300 421, 1-7, B-9, B-10, B-11
EN 300 744, 1-7
EN 300 784, B-12
EN 301 210, 1-7, B-9
EN 55022. See under electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) engineering menu (#14) network ID, C-39 original network ID, C-39 service ID, C-39 transport stream ID, C-39 enhanced features, 1-8, 1-9 synchronous data PID display, C-39 teletext PID display, C-39 environmental conditions, B-19 operational cooling requirements, B-19 humidity, B-19 temperature, B-19 storage/transportation cooling requirements, B-19 humidity, B-19 error correction, 1-12 error detection hierarchy (EDH) (menu), C-23
F
f sync. See frame sync factory default settings, 6-5 factory defaults, F-1 fan caution, 3-3 caution regarding insect/dust guard, 2-4 check fan is working, 6-3 fault-finding, 6-4 asynchronous data, 6-5 closed captions alarm, 6-6 preliminary investigations, 6-5
FCC. See under electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) firmware version covered by this manual, 1-4 foreign language manuals, ii forward error correction (FEC) digital ENG receiver, C-18 satellite receiver, C-13 terrestrial receiver, C-14, C-16 frame rate, C-22 frame sync connector, 2-16, B-14 enabling, 3-18 enabling (menu), C-23 locking, 2-16 locking (menu), C-23 not working, 6-6 offset (menu), C-23 reference signal, 3-18 the option, 3-18 front panel audio test connector, 2-21 bit error ratio meter, testing, 6-5 controls, 1-19 edit state, 1-17
LCD display, 1-7 testing, 6-5 monitoring, 1-21 normal state, 1-17 software download, 3-3 software manual switch, 3-3 switches, 1-7 testing the LEDs, 6-5 video test connector, 2-19 view, 1-3 fuse information, 6-8 replacement, 6-8
G
ghost correction reference (GCR), 1-9, C-25 guard interval, C-14, C-16, C-18
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index-3
Index
guided tour, 1-19 construction, 1-19 front panel controls, 1-19 rear panel, 1-22
H
handling the equipment, B-19 hardware type, C-30 height of equipment, B-19 hierarchy, C-14, C-16, C-18
I
IEC 958 compressed audio, C-28 consumer audio, C-28 professional audio, C-28 impedance analogue audio load, B-16 analogue audio output, B-16 digital audio load, B-17 digital audio output, B-17 input frequency range. See L-band. See L-band inputs
#4 decoder menu, C-12
ASI copper connector, 1-12, 2-11, B-8
ASI fibre-optic connector, 1-12, 2-11, B-8 baseband, C-14, C-18 baseband connector, 2-15, B-13 decoder, 1-12 digital ENG receiver, 1-16, B-14, C-18 digital ENG receiver menu, C-18 frame sync connector, 2-16, B-14
If connector (digital ENG), 2-16
L-band (#n) connector (8PSK), 2-13, C-13
L-band (#n) connector (BPSK/QPSK), 2-14, C-13 menu (#4) pages, C-12
P8R satellite receiver, B-9
PSR satellite receiver, B-10 remote control, 2-23, B-19 rf attenuator (terrestrial), 2-15 rf connector (terrestrial), 2-15 satellite receiver, 1-14, C-13 satellite receiver level display, C-13 set input level threshold, C-13 setting up (menu #4) decoder, 3-9, G-2 setting up (menu #4) digital ENG receiver, 3-7, 3-8 setting up (menu #4) satellite receiver, 3-6, G-1 setting up (menu #4) terrestrial receiver, 3-7, G-2
SPI connector, 1-12, 2-12, B-8 symbol rate, 1-15, 1-16 terrestrial receiver, 1-15, B-12, C-14 terrestrial receiver menu (#4), C-14, C-16 auto mode, C-16
UHF, C-14 video composite specification, B-5 installing the equipment, 2-3 accessories, 2-3 fixed usage only, 2-4 shelf supports, 2-3 side plates/fixing brackets, 2-4 intensity stereo. See joint stereo
ISO 13818, 1-7, B-6
J
joint stereo, audio, B-17
Index-4
L
language audio 1 current, C-28 audio 1 current preset, C-10 audio 1 default, C-28 audio 2 current, C-29 audio 2 current preset, C-10 audio 2 default, C-29 default decoding, C-11 descriptor, 3-11 non-ISO languages, E-2 selecting, 3-10, G-3 subtitles current preset, C-11 language, foreign, manuals, ii
L-band
(#n) input connector, 2-13, 2-14, C-13 specification, B-10 input frequency range, 1-14
LCD display, 1-7 setting the contrast, C-35 testing, 6-5
LEDs authorized, 4-4 description, 1-20 front panel, 1-20 remote control indication, 1-18 testing, 6-5 lightning protection, 2-5 line standard, C-22
525-line composite output, C-22
625-line composite output, C-22 power-up default, C-22 linear audio, 1-8, 5-4 local control, 1-17 lockout (over-air control), 1-18 low priority stream, C-30 low-noise block (LNB), 1-13 dc power from the receiver, 2-13, 2-14, B-12, C-13 setting the type, C-13 specification, B-12 use of an attenuator, 2-13, 2-14
M
M2
P8R/942A[C][D] description, 1-4
PDU/942[B][C][D] description, 1-4
PDU/942C[D] decoder transport stream output restrictions, 1-9
PSR/932[C] description, 1-5
PSR/942[A][B][C][D] description, 1-5
PTR/942 description, 1-5
PTR/948[A] description, 1-5
PTRE/942 description, 1-5
PTRE/948C description, 1-5 maintenance, cleaning, 6-3 marketing numbers, 1-4 mechanical inspections, 2-3 medium priority stream, C-30 menu
#1 status, C-8
Director status message, C-8
#10 CA, C-29 no conditional access, C-29
VideoGuard conditional access, C-30
#11 data, C-34
#12 timers, C-35 date, C-35
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index
time, C-35 time zone, C-35
#13 system, C-35
#14 engineering, C-39
#2 preset (services), C-9
#3 service, C-10
#4 input
M2/PDU942[B][C] decoder, C-12
M2/PTR/942[A][B] terrestrial receiver, C-14, C-16
M2/PTR/948[A][C] terrestrial receiver, C-14
M2/PTR/948[A][C][CVL] terrestrial receiver, C-16
M2/PTRE/942[B][C] digital ENG receiver input, C-18
#5 alarm
M2/P8R/942[A][B][C] satellite receiver menu, C-20
M2/PDU/942[B][C] decoder, C-19
M2/PSR/932[C] satellite receiver menu, C-20
M2/PSR/942[A][B][C] satellite receiver menu, C-20
M2/PTR/942 terrestrial receiver menu (#5), C-21
M2/PTR/948[A][C] terrestrial receiver menu (#5), C-21
M2/PTRE/942[B][C] digital ENG receiver, C-21
#6 video, C-22
#7 subtitles/VBI, C-24, C-25
#8 audio 1, C-28
#9 audio 2, C-29 descriptions, C-3 entering option values, 3-5 selecting options, 3-5 model numbers, C-36 menu #10 (VideoGuard), C-30 modem baud rate, 1-18 modulation mode digital ENG receiver, C-18 satellite receiver, C-13 terrestrial receiver, C-14, C-16 monitor, aspect ratio, C-22 monitoring, front panel, 1-21 moulded plugs, disposal of, 6-9
MPEG-2-only transport streams, 1-6, 3-6
N
Neilson coding, 1-9
AMOL1, C-24
AMOL2, C-24 network ID display, C-39 normal state, front panel, 1-17 notes, meaning of, vi
O
options
ASI, 5-4
BISS, 5-4 display, C-36
Dolby Digital (AC-3), 5-4
Frame Sync, 5-4
Linear Audio, 5-4
RAS, 5-4 original network ID display, C-39 outputs
525-line composite output, C-22
625-line composite output, C-22 alarm, 1-10 analogue composite video, 2-18, B-15
ASI fibre-optic output connector, 5-4 aspect ratio, C-22 audio, 1-10 audio 1, C-28 audio 1 output level, C-28
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
audio 1 system gain, C-28 audio 2, C-29 audio 2 output level, C-29 audio 2 system gain, C-29 audio analogue connector, 2-19 audio analogue connector, B-16 audio analogue specification, B-6 audio digital connector, 2-20, B-17 audio digital specification, B-6 audio monitor connector, B-17 audio test connector, 2-21 data, 1-8 data RS-232 connector, 2-22, B-18 data RS-422 connector, 2-21, B-18 digital audio, B-6 digital video, 2-18, B-16
M2/PDU/942C[D] decoder transport stream restrictions, 1-9 setting up the transport stream, 3-14 transport stream, 1-8, B-15 transport stream (SPI) connector, 1-9, 2-17 video, 1-9 video level, C-22 video test connector, 2-19, B-16 over-air control, 1-18 software download general description, 1-14 over-air software download
Menu #10 status display (VideoGuard), C-30
P
packet identifier (PID) asynchronous data PID display, C-39 audio 1 PID display, C-39 program clock reference (PCR) PID display, C-39 synchronous data PID display, C-39 teletext data PID display, C-39 video PID display, C-39 packet identifier (PID) audio 2 PID display, C-39 packet lengths, 3-14 parameters, storing service, C-9 parental control (VCHIP), C-24, C-25 performance, B-4 personalising the Alteia, 3-15
PIN number, 1-18 polarisation, C-13 post Reed-Solomon errors (P RS ERRS) alarm, C-21 power distribution system, B-20 power lines, 2-5 power supply, 6-8, B-20 auto-ranging PSU, 2-6 consumption, B-20 input connector, B-20
PSU operating ambient temperature, 2-6 rated current, B-20 rated frequency, B-20 rated voltage, B-20 specification, B-20 voltage selection, B-20 power-up default service, C-9 line standard, C-22 operation modes, 3-5 preset service default, 3-17 setting up preset service, 3-16 preset services clearing, 3-18 menu list, C-9
Index-5
Index
power-up default, 3-17, C-9 preset menu (#2) pages, C-9 setting up, 3-16 program clock reference (PCR), PID display, C-39 program map table (PMT) not available alarm, C-21 programme delivery and control (PDC), 1-9
PSU. See power supply
R
rack mounting standard, B-19 rear panel view, 1-22
Reed-Solomon decoding, 1-13, B-7 relays, auxiliary, 2-24 remote authorisation system (RAS), 1-8, 1-11, 1-22, 3-12 action of Authorized LED, 4-4
DSNG key, C-33 mode, C-33
RAS1, 3-13
RAS2, 3-13 remote control address, C-35 choosing the interface, C-35 connector, 2-23, B-19 fault-finding, 6-6 front panel LED, 1-18 protocol (ST.TS.E9200), 1-18 summary, 1-8 rf input connector, 2-15, 2-16 routing audio 1, C-28 audio 2, C-29 transport stream (SPI), C-34
RS-232 data connector, 2-22 remote control, 2-23, C-35
RS-422 data connector, 2-21
RS-485 remote control, 2-23, C-35
S
safety, B-21 ac supply operating voltage and fusing information, 2-6 disposal of moulded plugs, 6-9 handling and installation, 2-3 lightning protection, 2-5, 2-13, 2-14 moisture, 2-4 moving the equipment, 2-3 power lines, 2-5 wallsocket overloading, 2-6 sampling rates, audio, B-16 satellite receiver
8PSK L-band (#n) connector, 2-13 displayed BER value, C-13 forward error correction (FEC), C-13 input attenuator, 2-13, 2-14 input summary, 1-14 modulation mode, C-13
P8R input specification, B-9
PSR input specification, B-10
QPSK L-band (#n) input connector, 2-14 setting up the input, 3-6, G-1 signal acquisition range, C-13 system, 1-12 selecting a service, 3-9, G-2 audio component, 3-11 data component, 3-12 preferred component language, G-3 preferred component language, 3-10
Index-6
selecting menu options, 3-5 self-tests displaying the result, C-36 service ID display, C-39 service information (SI), 3-11 service menu (#3) pages, C-10 service provider, C-11 services clearing a preset, 3-18 list of teletext, C-11 selecting, 1-7, 3-9, G-2 service provider, C-11 setting the current service, C-11 setting up power-up default preset, 3-17 setting up power-up default service, C-9 setting up presets, 3-16 storing parameters, C-9 servicing checks on completion, 6-4 damage indicating a requirement., 6-3 replacement parts \b, 6-3 signal connections, 2-9 degradation mode, 6-7 level, C-13 single channel, audio, B-17 single packet burst mode, 1-12, 5-3 small rate buffer mode, C-36 small rbuff mode, C-37
SMPTE 302M-1998, B-6. See also linear audio. See also linear audio software download. See over-air software download software version covered by this manual, 1-4 introduction of new features, 1-6
VideoGuard boot code version, C-30 specification audio analogue output, B-6, B-16 audio digital output, B-6, B-17 audio monitor output, B-17 automatic gain control (AGC), B-18 auxiliary relays, B-19 data RS-232, B-18 data RS-422, B-18 decoder input, B-8 digital ENG receiver input, B-14
EN 300 421, 1-7
EN 300 744, 1-7
EN 301 210, 1-7 frame sync connector, B-14
ISO 13818, 1-7 low-noise block, B-12
P8R satellite input, B-9 power supply, B-20
PSR satellite input, B-10 remote control connector, B-19 television standards, B-5 terrstrial receiver input, B-12 transport stream output, B-15 video analogue composite output, B-15 video composite output, B-5 video digital output, B-16 video test output, B-16 status information asynchronous data, C-34 synchronous data, C-34
VideoGuard conditional access module, C-30
VideoGuard conditional access system, C-30 status menu (#1) pages, C-8 status screen, 1-7 stereo, audio, B-17 subtitles. See also DVB subtitles
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index
current preset language, C-11 current preset type, C-11 default decoding, C-11 default language, C-26 enabling, C-26 menu (#7), C-24, C-25 summary alarm, 4-4 summary of features, 1-7 supply cord, general description, 2-7 switching on, 3-3 symbol rate, 1-15, 1-16, C-13, C-14, C-16, C-18 sync enabling frame Sync, 3-18 frame sync connector, 2-16 frame sync not working, 6-6 frame sync option, 3-18 reference signal, 3-18 synchronous data, default decoding, C-11 synchronous parallel interface (SPI), 1-12 input connector, 2-12 system control mode, C-35 menu #13, C-35
T
technical earth, 2-8, 2-9 teletext, C-10 default decoding, C-11 enabling, C-25 list of services, C-11
PID display, C-39 terrestrial receiver auto mode, 3-8, C-16 baseband input connector, 2-15 baseband input connector connector, B-13 forward error correction (FEC), C-14, C-16 guard interval, C-14, C-16 hierarchy, C-14, C-16 input menu (#4)pages, C-14, C-16 specification, B-12, B-14 summary, 1-15 modulation constellation, C-14, C-16 modulation mode, C-14, C-16 rf input connector, 2-15, B-12 setting up the input, 3-7, G-2 system, 1-14 test pattern (menu), C-23 signal,video, C-23 time current, C-35 zone, C-35 timers current date, C-35 current time, C-35 local time zone, C-35 transmitter parameter signalling (TPS) alarm, C-21 transport stream display ID, C-39
MPEG-2-only decoding, 3-6 transport stream (SPI) output, 1-8, 1-9 bit-rate, B-7 connector, 2-17, B-15 routing, C-34 setting up, 3-14 specification, B-15
U
ultra-high frequency (UHF), 1-15 unsupported items
BISS mode 3, C-34
EMM PID display, C-39 self-test, C-36
V
ventilation, 2-4 air flow, 2-4 baffles between adjacent units, 2-4 forced air cooling in racks, 2-4 requirement for air space, 2-4 vertical blanking interval (VBI), 1-8
525 reinsertion, C-26 closed captions (CC), 1-8, C-24, C-25 closed captions alarm, 4-5, 6-6 ghost correction reference (GCR), 1-9, C-25 menu (#7), C-24, C-25
Neilson coding, 1-9
AMOL1, C-24
AMOL2, C-24 parental control (VCHIP), C-24, C-25 pass-through mode, C-24 programme delivery and control (PDC), 1-9 re-insertion and signalling, B-5 teletext, C-25 vertical interval test signals (VITS), 1-8, C-24, C-25 vertical interval time code (VITC), 1-9, C-25 video index, 1-9 wide-screen signalling (WSS), C-24 wide-screen signalling (WSS), 1-9 world system teletext (WST), 1-9 vertical interval test signals (VITS) enabling, 1-8, C-24 time code (VITC), C-25 video analogue composite output connector, 2-18, B-15 analogue composite output specification, B-15 aspect ratio, C-22 decoding, 1-7 digital output connector, 2-18, B-16 digital output specification, B-16 embedded audio (menu), C-23 frame rate, C-22 index, 1-9 line standard, C-22 menu (#6) pages, C-22 mode, C-22 output level, C-22 output summary, 1-9 pass through mode, C-26 performance, B-5
PID display, C-39 standards, B-15 supported bit-rates, B-4 supported resolutions, B-4 synchronisation to studio reference, 2-16 test connector, 2-19, B-16 test output specification, B-16 test signal, C-23 vbi pass-through mode, C-24 video programming system (VPS), C-24, C-25
VideoGuard, 1-8, 1-11, 1-18, 1-22, 3-12 action of Authorized LED, 4-4 assign low priority stream, C-30 assign medium priority stream, C-30
CA boot code version, C-30
Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8
Index-7
Index
CA conditional access system ID, C-30 conditional access module status information, C-30 conditional access system status information, C-30 menu (#10), C-30
Viterbi decoding, 1-13
W
warnings, meaning of, vi warranty, removing the covers, 1-3, 2-3 weight of equipment, B-19 what this manual describes, 1-3 who should use this manual, 1-3 wide screen signalling (WSS), 1-9 width of equipment, B-19 wire colours, 2-7 world system teletext (WST), 1-9
Index-8 Instruction Manual: Alteia and Alteia plus Professional Receivers and Decoders
ST.TM.E9200.8

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Multiple RF Inputs
- Support for multiple video formats
- Support for Dolby Digital AC-3
- Support for multiple audio formats
- Support for various Conditional Access systems
- Transport Stream Output
- Remote Control
- Director System support
- Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) signaling support
- Clock/Calendar